JP7224951B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A pachinko game machine or the like, which is an example of a game machine, includes, for example, push buttons and operation levers as a plurality of detection means capable of detecting actions of a player. There is a game machine capable of executing a promotion effect for prompting a player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to an operation lever (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-57252 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when one of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect image corresponding to the activated detection means is displayed, and the effect is monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that interest cannot be improved.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a player.

The game machine of means A is
A game machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result,
a detection means configured by a plurality of parts capable of detecting the action of the player;
promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect to prompt the player to perform an action detectable by the detection means;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes before the promotion effect is executed;
with
The promotion effects include a specific promotion effect executed in accordance with the specific effect, and a predetermined promotion effect executed in accordance with a predetermined effect executed independently of the specific effect,
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect using a special effect image different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect execution means is
a plurality of oblique component images simulating a state in which each component constituting the detection means is viewed obliquely can be displayed as the specific effect image;
In the specific effect, the specific effect image may be changed from an unfinished stage display mode in which the plurality of perspective part images are separated to a completed stage display mode in which all of the plurality of perspective part images are assembled. is possible and
In the specific effect, the separated oblique component images are displayed as if they were positioned on the front side of the screen near the player, and the size of the image is gradually reduced so that the image is displayed farther away from the player. Display so as to approach the perspective part image displayed as if it is located at the back of the screen,
The plurality of oblique component images displayed as the specific effect images are internal components having portions that are invisible to the player when the detecting means is completed by each of the components constituting the detecting means. While including the perspective part image of the predetermined part, it does not include the perspective part image of the predetermined part,
the perspective component image of the internal component is a simplified image in which a part of the shape of the internal component is omitted;
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. can be,
the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode when the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the display mode of the completion stage in the specific effect ,
The simplified image is an image in which a connector of the internal component is omitted.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specified result. and
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Before the promotion effect is executed, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes in stages (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect. 8-14 to 8-14, in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. Figure 8-16) and
with
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5 and a character image Z2 of "Close!" or, as shown in FIG.
When the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode (for example, the group success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect at a higher rate than when the parts collecting effect of failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. part to be processed (see Figures 8-10),
moreover,
Any of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing in FIGS. 9-15) that can be set to the setting value of
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable probability state according to the jackpot type such as a CPU 103 that controls the
As a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result is set according to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 048AKS010),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode and the expectation for the promotion effect to be executed in the second mode can be increased step by step, the interest in the game is improved. do. In addition, the display result of the variable display during the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The specific effect executing means is configured to generate effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to It is characterized by being able to display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is an effect executed in relation to the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific effect executing means can display a plurality of specific effect images in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed (for example, Each part image ZA1-ZA5, ZC1-ZC5 is a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface mode from the parts A1-A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1-C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. (See Fig. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion effect of the second mode.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The specific effect executing means displays a specific effect image at a higher rate when the advantageous state is obtained than when the advantageous state is not obtained, while a plurality of specific effect images are being displayed step by step in the specific effect. Change the mode (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modified example of FIG. 8-33 7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the change in the display mode of the specific effect images while the number of the specific effect images displayed increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The specific effect executing means displays the specific effect image in a manner in which it is difficult to identify which of the first mode of the promotion effect and the second mode of the promotion effect is to be executed in the specific effect. Displaying in a manner in which it is possible to identify which of the promotion effect of the first mode and the promotion effect of the second mode is to be executed (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the parts image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner that allows the player to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not known until the middle of the specific performance which of the promotion performance of the first mode and the promotion performance of the second mode will be executed, there is a sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion performance of the second mode. can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in the first mode when the specific effect image does not change to the specific display mode in the specific effect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect) When the push button 31B is determined, the ratio of production patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 failing to gather is higher than production patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 succeeding in gathering. 8-, when the part assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to be assembled is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 will be displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the promotion effect not being executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 7 to 15 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-218044, there is a special system in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is high during the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to change to a plurality of settings that are controllable to the state or that have different advantages for the player as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, and effects ( There was a setting suggestion production). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has room for improvement in the setting suggestion effect during the special state, and in view of this point, there is a demand for the provision of a gaming machine that can improve the amusement of the game in the special state. .

The game machine of means 7 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specified result. ) and
Any one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) A setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing in FIGS. 9-15) that can be set to the setting value of
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state according to the jackpot type such as a CPU 103 that controls the
As a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result, which is a part of the display result different from the specific result, is set according to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 048AKS010),
Characterized by

According to such a configuration, the display result of the variable display during the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to means 7,
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means continues the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the probability variable state is a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the jackpot game state. such as ending when a special game is executed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the normal state is reached without being controlled in the advantageous state after being controlled in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to means 7 or 8,
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined result (for example, types A to types C, etc.),
The type of the predetermined result to be displayed differs according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, different types of predetermined display are displayed at different ratios depending on the set value),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which type of predetermined result is displayed.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 9,
By making the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display of the target which has not yet been disclosed as a special result, a pre-reading effect is executed to foretell that the display result of the variable display of the target will be the specific result. Further includes a prefetching effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 etc. that executes the prefetching chance eye at step 048AKS012),
The predetermined result is a display result different from the special result (for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of patterns different from the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the predetermined display. etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to differentiate the special result and the predetermined result as the look-ahead effect, and prevent confusion with the advance notice effect for the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 10,
By making the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display of the target which has not yet been disclosed as a special result, a pre-reading effect is executed to foretell that the display result of the variable display of the target will be the specific result. Further includes a prefetching effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 etc. that executes the prefetching chance eye at step 048AKS012),
The predetermined result is a display result different from the special result (for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of patterns different from the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the predetermined display. etc.),
While the special result can be displayed continuously in multiple variable displays, the predetermined result is restricted so as not to be displayed continuously in multiple variable displays (for example, the look-ahead chance number is displayed over multiple variations). While it is possible to display continuously, the predetermined display is restricted so that it is not displayed continuously),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion with the look-ahead effect due to the continuous display of the predetermined results.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 11,
At the timing of being controlled to the normal state after being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a predetermined frequency display effect indicating the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed in the special state (for example, the processing of step 048AKS052 is executed. 9-28 (f) for effect control CPU 120 etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the player can confirm the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed, and can easily predict the set value.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 12,
After being controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state and first controlled to the special state, if the state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the advantageous state again in the special state, the state is controlled to the normal state. At the timing, it is possible to execute a predetermined frequency display effect that indicates the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed (for example, once it is controlled to a variable probability state, it does not become a big hit again and becomes a normal state only at the timing when the predetermined display such as displaying the count value provided according to the type of
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by the continuous residence.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to means 12 or 13,
A detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B, etc.) that detects the action of the player is further provided,
The predetermined frequency display effect can be executed when the player's motion is detected by the detection means (for example, based on the detection of the player's motion on the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B, display a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, an effect can be executed according to the taste of the player.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 14,
In the timing of shifting from the special state to the normal state when the special state is continuously controlled a plurality of times, the advantage corresponding to the special state a plurality of times is not executed without executing the display effect of the predetermined frequency. Execute a total number display effect that displays the number of game media given during the state (for example, if Yes is determined in step 048AKS051, execute the processing of step 048AKS054, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the total number display effect is executed instead of the predetermined frequency display effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing the pachinko game machine 1 used in the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) is a perspective view showing an operation unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the push button; (A) is a perspective view showing a ball-hitting operation handle, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the ball-hitting operation handle. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control process processing of the characteristic part 063SG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing of the characteristic portion 063SG; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an operation object determination ratio in an operation prompting effect, (B) is a diagram showing an assembly effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of the assembly effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the part set effect pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing the part set effect pattern determination ratio. (A) is a diagram showing how the display mode of the push buttons changes in the component assembly effect, and (B) is a diagram illustrating how the display mode of the stick controller changes in the component group effect. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing of the characteristic portion 063SG; FIG. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols to the start of the super ready-to-win effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly effect. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on effect pattern A or C. FIG. (A) to (H) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on effect pattern B or D. FIG. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of an operation prompting effect. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the production in the jackpot game state. It is a figure explaining the flow of production from the start of the jackpot game state to the normal game state via the time saving state. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the handle assembly effect in the firing operation prompting effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing right-hand shot notification. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the handle assembly effect in the firing operation prompting effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing right-hand shot notification. (G) to (K) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the game ball flowing effect in the shooting operation promotion effect B, and (L) is a diagram showing right hitting notification. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an assembly effect in the modified example 1 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing a super ready-to-win effect in modification 2 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the steering wheel assembly effect in the modified example 3 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the route construction effect in the modification 4 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) is a diagram showing an operation mode of a movable body, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing a structure of the movable body. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as Modified Example 5. FIG. (D) to (G) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting presentation as Modified Example 5. FIG. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting presentation as a modification 6 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (E) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of a part assembly effect as a modification example 7 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of an operation prompting presentation as Modified Example 8 of the characteristic portion 063SG. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio, such as the execution presence or absence of a look-ahead chance eye. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows an example of determination processing, such as a non-reach-loss stop design. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of predetermined display determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution/non-execution of a predetermined display and a determination ratio thereof; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of predetermined display, and its determination ratio. It is a flow chart which shows an example of final fluctuation production setting processing. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example when predetermined display and count value display for every kind are performed. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of production mode determination processing, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a production mode storage buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio of production mode next time. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of whether or not a setting suggestion effect is executed and the determination ratio thereof; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of setting suggestion effects and their determination ratios; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of mode suggestion effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of mode suggesting effects and their decision ratios; It is a timing chart showing the transition of the game state and the production state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of setting suggestion effects and their determination ratios; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of specific production execution setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution presence or absence of specific production|presentation, and its determination ratio. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of specific effects and their determination ratios; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of special production|presentation, and its determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example when specific production|presentation and special production|presentation are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an eye-catching image is displayed as a character image displayed as a specific effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (more specifically, (to be described later)), game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big winning slot, the occurrence of a prize, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON, it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102, an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal, the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal, the CPU 103 performs restoration processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 063SG)
Next, the characterizing portion 063SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "063SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 8-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side. The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

(Game area)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 used in the characterizing portion 063SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the characteristic portion 063SG. 8-2, (A) is a perspective view showing the operation unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 8-3 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the push button. 8-4, (A) is a perspective view showing the ball-hitting operation handle, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the ball-hitting operation handle.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the game area Y of the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the characterizing part 063SG of the present embodiment, the first route K1 of the flow-down routes through which game balls flow is A second route K2, which is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the center decorative frame 5c surrounding the image display device 5, and which is different from the first route K1 among the flow-down routes for the game balls, displays an image when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the center decorative frame 5c surrounding the display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path K1 is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path K2 is called right hitting. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area Y, so it may be called a left-handed path. Further, the second path K2 is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area Y, so it may be called a right-handed path. It should be noted that the first route K1 and the second route K2 may be composed of separate routes, or may be routes that are partly shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area Y, the arrangement of obstacle nails, or the like.

In this embodiment, game balls flowing down the first path K1 are guided to enter the winning ball device 6A, while game balls flowing down the second path K2 pass through the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device. 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are guided so as to be able to enter. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down the second path K2 may enter the winning ball device 6A.

A movable body 32 is provided above the display area of the image display device 5 . The movable body 32 is provided so as to be vertically movable between an origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and an effect position positioned substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 ( 8-29(A)), the effect control CPU 120 can move the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at a predetermined timing during the variable display period or during the jackpot game state.

(Operation unit 600)
As shown in FIG. 8-2, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrated as an operation unit 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the stick controller 31A includes a base body 601 mainly made of metal, gripping members 602L and 602R covering the base body 601 from left and right sides, and front surfaces of the gripping members 602L and 602R. It mainly has a lens cover 603 attached to the side, a rear base 604 arranged on the rear side of the base body 601, and a push button 31B attached to the upper part of the integrated grip members 602L and 602R.

The base body 601 is composed of a base portion 601A and a rotating portion 601C capable of rotating around a rotating shaft 601B directed in the horizontal direction with respect to the base portion 601A. The controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back base 604, and the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2) built in the push button 31B are connected to the effect control board 12. A wiring C, a connector CN, and the like are provided for this purpose.

The operation unit 600 is manufactured, for example, by: 1. 2. assembling the rear base 604 to the base body 601; 2. assembling the gripping members 602L and 602R to the rotating portion 601C; 4. Attaching the lens cover 603 to the front surfaces of the gripping members 602L and 602R; It is constructed by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the push button 31B to the upper part of the gripping members 602L and 602R. Note that the assembly process is optional, and the assembly may be performed in processes other than those described above. Moreover, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the base body 601 is referred to as part A1, the rear base 604 as part A2, the lens cover 603 as part A3, the push button 31B as part A4, and the gripping members 602L and 602R as part A5. sometimes. Further, among these parts A1 to A5, the part A5 (gripping members 602L and 602R) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts A1 to A4. The “characteristic part” is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a part that constitutes the stick controller 31</b>A that constitutes a part of the operation unit 600 .

Specifically, the part A5 (gripping members 602L and 602R) is the A. B. being a member operated (held) by the player; C. It has a shape that makes it easy to remember that it is a grip part. D. being larger than the other parts A1 to A4 (occupying a larger area for the entire operation unit 600); It is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, conditions A, B, C, D, etc. here) of being a part that is arranged in a conspicuous position for the player. A characteristic part of the parts of 31A will be described as part A5 (gripping members 602L and 602R).

As shown in FIG. 8-2(A), the stick controller 31A configured in this manner can be operated by grasping the gripping portion composed of the gripping members 602L and 602R and the lens cover 603 and pulling it forward. The sensor unit 35A detects an operation (movement) by the player.

(Push button 31B)
As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B is assembled under the base member 651 and the base member 651, and is arranged under the base member 651 and the sensor substrate 652 provided with the push sensor 35B. It is mainly composed of a vibrated member 653 vibrated by a vibration motor (not shown), a holding member 654 that holds the vibrated member 653 , and a transparent cover member 655 that covers the upper side of the holding member 654 .

The push button 31B is, for example, 1. at the time of manufacture. 2. assembling the sensor substrate 652 to the base member 651; 3. Assembling the sensor substrate 652 to the base member 651; 4. Assembling the member to be vibrated 653 to the holding member 654; 5. assembling to the holding member 654 in which the member to be vibrated 653 is assembled to the base member 651; It is configured by assembling a cover member 655 to a base member 651 . Note that the assembly process is optional, and the assembly may be performed in processes other than those described above. Moreover, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the base member 651 is referred to as component C1, the sensor substrate 652 as component C2, the member to be vibrated 653 as component C3, the holding member 654 as component C4, and the cover member 655 as component C5. Sometimes. Further, among these parts C1 to C5, the part C5 (cover member 655) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts C1 to C4. The "characteristic part" is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a part that constitutes the push button 31B.

Specifically, the part C5 (cover member 655) is an A.C. B. being a member operated (depressed) by the player; C. The shape is easy to remember as a button. D. being larger than the other parts C1 to C4 (the area occupied by the entire push button 31B is large); It is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, conditions A, B, C, D, etc. here) of being a part that is arranged in a conspicuous position for the player. A characteristic part among the parts of 31B will be described as part C5 (cover member 655).

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B configured in this way detects the operation (movement) by the player by the push sensor 35B by pressing the operating portion configured by the cover member 655. It's like

(Ball operation handle 30)
As shown in FIG. 8-4, the ball hitting operation handle 30 is composed of a handle base 720 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 with screws (not shown) and various members attached to the front side of the handle base 720. . As shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the handle base 720 is composed of a tubular portion 720a and a dish-shaped flange portion 720b extending from the front end portion of the tubular portion 720a. An insertion passage 721 through which a handle shaft 726 is inserted through a handle collar 727 from the front side is formed through the center of the cylindrical portion 720a in the front-rear direction. Fixing bosses 722 and 723 for fixing the handle cover 735 protrude from the upper and lower portions of the flange portion 720b. The front and rear positions of the handle shaft 726 with respect to the insertion passage 721 are determined by an E-ring 726a attached to the outer periphery.

On the front left side of the flange portion 720b, there is a single-shot switch lever 724 having an operation portion 724b that is operated when shooting game balls one by one. A single-shot switch 725 for detecting the single-shot switch lever 724 is attached near the single-shot switch lever 724 by a screw 725a.

An annular touch ring 728 is non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the flange portion 720b by screws 728a, and an annular touch attachment plate 729 is attached to the front surface of the touch ring 728 by screws 729a. are fixed to the handle base 720 . A handle ring 730 that is rotatably operated by the player is assembled to the front side of the touch mounting plate 729 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the touch mounting plate 729 . The touch ring 728, handle sensor (not shown) and single switch 725 are connected to the main board 11 via a payout control board (not shown) by wiring C, connector CN and the like.

The handle ring 730 is formed with a fitting hole 732 in the center into which the tip of the handle shaft 726 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. 733a and an arc-shaped insertion groove 733b through which the fixing boss 723 is inserted are formed. It is located on the front side of plate 729 .

A handle cover 735 arranged on the front side of the handle ring 730 has decorations (for example, model-specific patterns, marks, characters, titles, manufacturer's logos, etc.) on the front, which are not shown. It is fixed to the fixing bosses 722 and 723 by a screw 731a inserted through the fixing boss 722 and a screw 731b inserted through the fixing boss 723 from the rear side of the flange portion 720b. Therefore, the handle ring 730 is rotatably attached to the touch mounting plate 729 within a rotation range of about 90 degrees around the handle shaft 726 facing in the front-rear direction. A handle spring 734 interposed between the handle cover 735 and the handle ring 730 always urges the handle ring 730 in the counterclockwise direction.

The ball-striking operation handle 30 is manufactured by, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the touch ring 728 to the handle base 720; 2. Assemble the touch mounting plate 729; 3. Assemble the handle ring 730 integrated with the handle shaft 726; It is configured by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the handle cover 735 . Note that the assembly process is optional, and the assembly may be performed in processes other than those described above. Moreover, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the handle base 720 and the touch ring 728 are part B1, the touch mounting plate 729 is part B2, the handle ring 730 is part B3, and the handle cover 735 integrated with the handle shaft 726 is part B4. It is sometimes called and explained. Further, among these parts B1 to B4, the part B4 (handle cover 735 integrated with the handle shaft 726) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts B1 to B4. The “characteristic part” is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a part forming part of the ball-striking operation handle 30 .

Specifically, the part B4 (handle cover 735) is the A.I. B. being a member operated by a player; C. It has a shape that makes it easy to remember that it is an operation part. D. being larger than the other parts B1 to B4 (the area occupied by the entire ball-striking operation handle 30 is large); It is a part that satisfies at least one of the conditions (for example, conditions C and D here) of being a part that is placed in a conspicuous position for the player. Among them, a characteristic part will be described as part B4 (handle cover 735).

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), in the ball-striking operation handle 30 configured in this way, the handle shaft 726 is rotated by rotating the handle ring 730 to the right against the biasing force of the handle spring 734. By transmitting the amount of rotation to a shooting device (not shown), the game ball set at the shooting position is launched (shot) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation.

In this characterizing portion 063SG, a big hit type determination table is stored in the ROM 101 . The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot game state as "big hit". is a table referenced by In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot B'.

As the jackpot types, after the end of the jackpot game state, high-precision control and time-saving control are executed and the transition to a high-probability base state is performed. In the "non-probability variable jackpot" is set in which only time-saving control is executed and transitions to a low-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a predetermined number of special game games (for example, 100 times) are executed, or the predetermined number of special game games are executed. It ends by entering a jackpot game state before being played.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non- The allocation of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "variable probability jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (for example, the value in the range of "71" to "100") is the number of rounds "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds While assigned to the jackpot type, when the special figure variably displayed is the second special figure, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variable jackpot B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in a special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type as "probability variable jackpot B" and control to a normal open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls to be obtained is small, thereby preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. It's like

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value to the "non-variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure (for example, value in the range of “1” to “51”), so the probability of a non-probable hit and the probability of a hit are the first special special game or the second special. are considered to be the same regardless of

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for the "variable probability big hit B" is different depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure, the "variable probability big hit A ” also differs depending on whether it is the first special special game or the second special special game, and for the “probability variable jackpot A” with a large number of rounds, the second special special game The case is set to be easier to determine than the case of the first special figure special figure game. In other words, the second special game is more advantageous for the player than the first special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". may For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, a smaller determination value than in the case of the special game of the first special may be assigned to the "probability variable jackpot B" jackpot type. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

In this way, in this characteristic part 063SG, in the normal state (low base state) which is not the time saving state (high base state), even if the game ball flows down the second route K2 by hitting to the right, the game ball enters the second start winning opening Since it is difficult to enter, it is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball into the first start winning hole by hitting left, while in the time-saving state (high base state) or in the jackpot game state, the game ball is hit by right hitting. If the second route K2 flows down, the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, which is more advantageous for the player than making the game ball win the first starting winning hole by hitting left.

FIG. 8-5 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 063SG. In this characteristic portion 063SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and is variable. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 063SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 063SG is executed is shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach variation patterns. is set. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is performed in this characteristic part 063SG, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed The special figure variable display time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 063SG, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is set so that the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach In the reach variation pattern, the longer the variable display time, the higher the expectation of a "big hit".

In addition, in the present feature unit 063SG, as described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 063SG. In this characteristic portion 063SG, the variation pattern to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-6, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present characteristic portion 063SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the fluctuation special figure is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3, select the changing pattern determination table B for losing, and the losing Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 4, the change pattern determination table C for losing is selected, and the losing Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table D for loss to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic portion 063SG is "losing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach-losing variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate at which variable display is performed. It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

FIG. 8-7 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (step S76) shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the firing operation promotion effect process of 063SGS162 after the pre-reading notice setting process of 063SGS161, and then performs one of the processes of 063SGS170 to 063SGS175 according to the value of the effect process flag. I do. In addition, in this characteristic portion 063SG, the effect processing during the small hit of S174 and the end effect processing of the end of the small hit of S175 shown in FIG. Carry up. In addition, the contents of the firing operation promotion rendering process will be described later.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (063SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer (not shown) at the time of start winning ” are shifted upward by one buffer number (063SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 063SGS271 (063SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (063SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number Shift up by minutes (063SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 063SGS272 or 063SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (063SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (063SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 063SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (Losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After the processing of 063SGS276, in 063SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern designation command. If the variation pattern is not the SP reach variation pattern, select the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (063SGS278).

On the other hand, when it is determined in 063SGS277 that the variation pattern is the SP ready-to-win variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs operation promotion effect pattern determination processing for determining the operation promotion effect type (063SGS279). Here, the operation prompting effect will be described.

(Operation promotion effect)
In this characteristic part 063SG, when the super reach variation pattern PA2-2 or PB1-2 is determined in the variation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 5, the effect control CPU 120 executes the super reach effect during variable display. At the same time, at a predetermined timing during execution of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is validated, and during the operation valid period, the player can make an action that can be detected by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In other words, an operation prompt effect is executed to prompt the player to operate either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and if there is an operation, the result of the variable display is notified. there is

Below, the flow from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the end of the super ready-to-win effect will be described. FIGS. 8-13 (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols to the start of the super ready-to-win effect. FIGS. 8-14 (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly presentation. FIGS. 8-15 (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly presentation. FIGS. 8-16 (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly presentation. FIGS. 8-17 are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on effect pattern A or C in (A) to (G). 8-18 (A) to (H) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern B or D. FIG. 8-19 (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of an operation prompting presentation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13(A), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative design, and then, as shown in FIG. After setting the display mode to the predetermined ready-to-win state, as shown in FIG. 8-13(C), super ready-to-win effect is started with the development of super ready-to-win. In this characterizing portion 063SG, a battle presentation in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other is executed as a super ready-to-win presentation. Incidentally, in this characterizing section 063SG, a battle effect is executed as a super ready-to-win effect, but an effect other than the battle effect may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts accepting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the battle effect, and validates the detection of the operation during this operation valid period. An operation prompting effect is executed to prompt the operation of the operation target (the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) that has been set. As shown in FIG. 8-19(A), the operation prompting effect is to display a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 reading "Exit!" on the image display device 5, or B), the image display device 5 displays a push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and a character image Z4 reading "Push!". It is also possible to output sounds such as "Pull!" and "Push!"

Next, the timing at which the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, that is, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected. The result of the battle presentation is notified at the timing when the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B does not input the detection signal, or when the operation valid period has passed without input of the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. For example, when the variable display result is a big win, as shown in FIGS. If the display result is a loss, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) and (F), if the player loses, the variable display result is reported as a loss.

That is, at the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed during the operation effective period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective at the timing of notifying whether or not the variable display result will result in a big win. It is said to be a production that In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it may be notified that the variable display result is a big hit by executing a relief effect after announcing that the player has lost the battle performance.

(Controller assembly performance)
In addition, in the present characteristic portion 063SG, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 8-19(A) or FIG. Before the push button image Z3 imitating the button 31B is displayed, that is, before the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective, the controller assembly rendering for assembling the stick controller 31A can be executed. When the assembly is successful (completed), the controller image Z1 prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed at a high rate. The button image Z3 is displayed at a high rate.

The stick controller 31A is composed of a plurality of parts (members) as described with reference to FIG. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed in order in the form of assembly, and as shown in FIG. It is said that

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-17(A) to 8-17(F), the effect pattern A displays a component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A1, and then displays a component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A5. The part image ZA5 is displayed in the form of assembling, the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 is displayed in the part image ZA1 in the form of assembling, and the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 is displayed in the part image ZA1 in the form of assembling. Then, by displaying the part image ZA4 corresponding to the part A4 on the part image ZA1 in a manner of assembling, a completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed. In other words, it is a pattern in which assembly is successful (completed).

As shown in FIGS. 8-18(A) to 8-18(G), the effect pattern B is a mode in which a part image ZA1 corresponding to the part A1 is displayed, and then a part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 is attached to the part image ZA1. , the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZA1, the part image ZA4 corresponding to the part A4 is displayed in the part image ZA1, and the part image ZA1 is displayed. By displaying the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5 in the manner in which the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5 is assembled, the completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed, that is, the assembly is successful. It is a pattern to (complete).

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) to (E) and (G), production pattern C has the same parts assembly order as production pattern A, but parts corresponding to part A4 are shown in part image ZA1. After the image ZA4 is displayed in the form of assembly, an unfinished image ZA7 is finally displayed in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed. That is, the assembly fails (is not completed). is.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (F) and (H), production pattern D has the same parts assembly order as production pattern B, but parts corresponding to part A5 are shown in part image ZA1. After the image ZA5 is displayed in the form of assembly, an unfinished image ZA7 is finally displayed in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed. That is, the assembly fails (is not completed). is.

Also, the assembly order of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in these production patterns A to D is shown in FIG. Since the assembly order is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process described, the production effect can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZA1-ZA5 in the effect patterns A-D may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are images that do not include some of the multiple components (members) constituting the stick controller 31A. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 (rear base 604) includes wiring C, connector CN, controller sensor unit 35A, and push button CN that the actual rear base 604 has. Since the display of the component images corresponding to the electronic components such as the sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 is spoiled by the electronic component images corresponding to the electronic components such as the wiring C and the connector CN. can be suppressed. It should be noted that display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

In addition, in production pattern B, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed in order to be assembled, and as shown in FIGS. By displaying the component image ZA5 corresponding to the component A5 in a manner in which it is assembled after the component images ZA1 to ZA4, it is possible to appropriately draw attention to the stick controller 31A and to most recognize the stick controller 31A. By displaying the easy-to-assemble part image ZA5 at the end, it becomes difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end, which improves interest.

Furthermore, the component image ZA5 is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the other component images ZA1 to ZA4. Specifically, the mode in which the visibility for the player is higher than that of the other component images ZA1 to ZA4 is, for example, the mode in which the component image ZA5 is attached to the component image ZA1 as shown in FIG. 8-18(E). , the component image ZA5 is displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image is displayed around the component image ZA5 to emphasize it, or the image display device 5 is moved from the peripheral edge of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center. , etc., in which the player can more easily identify the parts than the other parts images ZA1 to ZA4. By displaying in this manner, the production effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the controller assembly effect includes effect patterns A and B that display the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in a manner that they are assembled to the component image ZA1, and the component image ZA5 that is assembled to the component image ZA1. When the effect patterns A and B for finally displaying the completed controller image Z1 are determined including the effect patterns C and D in which the completed controller image Z1 is not displayed by displaying in a non-attached mode, A big win is achieved at a higher rate than the effect patterns C and D in which the finally completed controller image Z1 is not displayed. Therefore, the player can expect success (completion) of the assembly effect, and thus the interest is improved.

Also, even if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the push button 31B may be determined as the operation target, or the effect patterns A and C in which the characteristic part A4 is not assembled last may be selected. Otherwise, the performance patterns C and D, which are not completed due to failure in assembly, may be selected, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be maintained regardless of which performance pattern is selected. can.

Further, in this characterizing section 063SG, as an effect pattern for the controller assembly effect, one of the effect patterns A to D is selected as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any one of a plurality of effect patterns including other effect patterns with different component types, component assembly orders, etc. may be selectable.

In the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279 in FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines which operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid based on the result of the variable display, and whether to execute the controller assembly effect. The presence or absence and, if executed, which of production patterns A to D is to be executed is determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-9(A), the effect control CPU 120 activates the operation unit (operation As a target), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 80%, and the push button 31B is determined at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is a loss variation pattern (when the variable display result is a loss), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 20% as the operation unit (operation target) whose operation is valid, and the push button 31B. is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective at the end of the battle production, the hit is more likely to occur than when the operation of the push button 31B becomes effective. High degree.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9(B), when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the controller assembly effect at a rate of 5%, and the effect pattern A is determined. It is determined at a rate of 25%, effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 60%, and effect patterns C and D are each determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is determined to be operated, non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, effect patterns A and B are each determined at a rate of 5%, and effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%. The ratio is determined, and the production pattern D is determined at a ratio of 20%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 stores in the RAM 122 the type of the determined operation target, whether or not to execute the controller assembly performance, and the type of the determined performance patterns A to D in the case of execution. Note that the above determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target, the controller assembly effect is executed at a higher rate than when the controller assembly effect is not executed, and the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembly fail to assemble. On the other hand, when the operation target is determined to be the push button 31B, the controller assembly effect is not executed at a higher rate than when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A. In addition, even when execution of the controller assembly performance is determined, performance patterns C and D in which assembly fails are determined at a higher rate than performance patterns A and B in which assembly succeeds.

Therefore, if the controller assembly effect is executed and the assembly is successful, the ratio of the big win is higher than if the controller assembly effect is not executed or if the assembly is unsuccessful. Also, if the controller assembly effect is not executed, the failure rate is higher than if the assembly succeeds. That is, the performance patterns A and B that are successfully assembled have a higher reliability of big win than the performance patterns C and D that are unsuccessfully assembled. A performance pattern B that succeeds in assembling has a higher reliability of big win than a performance pattern A that succeeds in assembling, and a performance pattern C that fails in assembling has a lower reliability of big win than a performance pattern D that fails in assembling. Therefore, the performance pattern B, the performance pattern A, the performance pattern D, and the performance pattern C are set so that the reliability of the big win increases in this order. Note that the above determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big win, the effect control CPU 120 selects the stick controller 31A as the operation target at a higher rate than the push button 31B, and when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, assembly is performed. Since the performance patterns A and B that succeed in assembling are selected at a higher rate than the performance patterns C and D that fail in assembling, if the controller assembly performance succeeds and the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective, a big win is achieved at a high rate. .

Further, in the operation prompting effect, the operation prompting notification is given by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 at the start timing of the operation effective period as shown in FIGS. In addition, by performing the controller assembly effect before these operation prompting notifications are performed, that is, before the operation effective period starts, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stick controller 31A for performing the operation. Therefore, it is possible to notify in advance that the valid operation period will start, especially for players who have little experience in playing games. Furthermore, instead of displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. Since it becomes possible to make it conscious, interest can be suitably improved.

Incidentally, when it is determined not to execute the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, the controller assembly effect is not started even at the start timing of the controller assembly effect. By displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 as shown in 19B, the operation prompting notification is performed.

Further, in this characteristic portion 063SG, an example has been exemplified in which non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, but the present invention is not limited to this. ZA5 may be displayed, but the mode of assembling these component images ZA1 to ZA5 may not be displayed, that is, a presentation pattern in which the mode of non-assembling is displayed may be selectable.

Further, after the button part images corresponding to the parts constituting the push button 31B are displayed, the button part images are displayed in the form of assembling, and after starting the push button assembly presentation, before or after the assembly is completed, the push button is pushed. It may have an effect pattern that fails to assemble by displaying the button image Z3 in a disassembled manner.

Furthermore, after the push button image Z3 is displayed in a disassembled manner, the controller assembling effect may be started to display the controller image Z1 after successful assembly.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (F) and 8-18 (G), after displaying the state of assembling the final component images ZA4 and ZA5, the assembled controller image Z1 is displayed for the game machine. The manner in which the frame 3 is assembled to the glass door frame or the like may be displayed.

(Parts assembly performance)
In this characteristic portion 063SG, the effect control CPU 120, before starting the operation promoting effect in the super ready-to-win effect, creates a related effect image related to the effect image (the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3) used for the operation promoting effect. After the stepwise display, any one of the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is displayed. It is possible to execute a parts set effect that can be specified as to whether it will be executed.

The stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are composed of a plurality of parts (members) as described with reference to FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3. Part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to five parts A1 to A5 out of the plurality of parts, and part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to five parts C1 to C5 out of the plurality of parts constituting the push button 31B, As related effect images related to the effect images (the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect, they are sequentially displayed step by step one by one during the execution period of the battle effect.

Then, when all or part of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A are displayed in the part gathering effect, there is a high possibility that the operation of the stick controller 31A will be promoted in the subsequent operation promoting effect. It is suggested that when all or part of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B are displayed, there is a high possibility that the operation of the push button 31B will be promoted in the subsequent operation promotion effect. be. That is, in the part gathering effect executed before the operation promoting effect is executed, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step, so that the operation is promoted in the operation promoting effect. It suggests (becomes identifiable) whether the unit is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-14, the effect control CPU 120, when displaying the battle effect image Z50 for the battle effect in the display area of the image display device 5, causes the battle effect image Z50 in the display area. A plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are arranged one by one and displayed in a specific display area Z51 above.

When displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, first, it is determined which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B. After being displayed in a difficult-to-identify, difficult-to-identify mode, it changes to an identifiable mode in which it is possible to identify which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B. After that, the display mode is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) and (B), both the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B are displayed. The display mode changes in a plurality of steps (for example, four steps) in accordance with the passage of time from the start of the display.

Each part image ZA1-ZA5, ZC1-ZC5 is a black silhouette different in external shape and surface from the parts A1-A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1-C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. It is displayed in a common silhouette form in which white characters "?" are displayed. The common silhouette mode is a mode that is commonly used when displaying component images for either stick controller 31A or push button 31B.

In the third stage, the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed in a black individual silhouette form. The individual silhouette mode is a non-common mode that is separately used when displaying the component image of the stick controller 31A and when displaying the component image of the push button 31B.

At the fourth stage, the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed in icon mode. In the fourth stage, the parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in white in a normal mode, and the parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in different colors (for example, red), and flames are displayed around them. It is possible to display a special mode of displaying the effect image shown.

When the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in order, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of each component image in the order of the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage. . For example, using moving image display, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 in the first stage may be gradually changed to the display mode of the component images in the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage. After displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 of the first stage, the display is switched (updated) to the component images of the second, third, and fourth stages each time a predetermined time elapses. You may change an aspect.

In this way, in the first to third stages, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are in the silhouette form, that is, the player can identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. is displayed in a difficult-to-distinguish manner, and in the fourth stage, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, the player can identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. displayed in an identifiable manner. Therefore, from the start of the display of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 to the third stage, the player cannot predict which component image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B will be displayed. can attract interest as to how the part images are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as the specific effect images are the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect. As a mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is to be executed, the part images of the first to third steps are targeted, but the third step As for the component images, it is possible to identify them by comparing the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B.

Here, an example of a component assembly effect that displays the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B will be described. As shown in FIG. A specific display area Z51 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing when a predetermined time has passed since is displayed (first step). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(B), the part image ZC1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-14(C) , the part image ZC1 is displayed in the form of an individual silhouette (third step), and then the part image ZC1 is displayed in the form of an icon as shown in FIG. 8-14(D) (fourth step).

Further, when the component image ZC1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC2 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (D) to (G)). Further, when the component image ZC2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC3 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-14 (G) to (J)). Further, when the component image ZC3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC4 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-14 (J) to (M)). Further, when the component image ZC4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC5 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (M) to (Q)).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (M) to (Q), the last component image ZC5 is displayed in a black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed to the second mode in the same manner as the component image ZC1. When changing from the 1st stage to the 4th stage, the surroundings of the part image ZC5 are highlighted, such as by blinking, so that the change to the 4th stage produces an effect that encourages whether or not the assembly will be successful. may

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, or the number of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increases. By increasing, the display mode of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 gradually changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(Q), when the component image ZC5 is displayed in the icon form, all the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed and the assembly of the components is successful. On the other hand, for example, after the component image ZC4 is displayed in the silhouette mode in FIGS. is not displayed and the collection of parts may fail.

In addition, to explain the component gathering effect of displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. , a horizontally long rectangular specific display area Z51 is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, and the part image ZA1 is displayed in a black circular common silhouette mode on the left side of the specific display area Z51. (first step). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15(B), the part image ZA1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-15(C) , the part image ZA1 is displayed in the form of an individual silhouette (third step), and then the part image ZA1 is displayed in the form of an icon as shown in FIG. 8-15(D) (fourth step).

Further, when the component image ZA1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA2 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (D) to (G)). Further, when the component image ZA2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA3 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-15 (G) to (J)). Further, when the component image ZA3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA4 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-15 (J) to (M)). Further, when the component image ZA4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA5 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage to the It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (M) to (Q)).

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, or the number of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increases. By increasing, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 gradually changes. When the component image ZA5 is displayed in the icon form as shown in FIG. 8-15(Q), all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed and the assembly of the components is successful. On the other hand, for example, after the component image ZA4 is displayed in the silhouette mode in FIGS. is not displayed and the collection of parts may fail.

In this embodiment, when the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in stages, one component image is displayed and changed from the first step to the fourth step, and then the other images are displayed. Although the form in which the component images are displayed in order has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. While changing to the 2nd or 3rd stage where it is difficult to display, the other part images are changed to the 2nd or 3rd stage in the same way. It is also possible to change the display mode of at least a part of the component images among the plurality of component images that are displayed up to the fourth stage. By doing so, it is not possible to know which part image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B will be displayed until the predetermined number of part images are displayed, so that the player's interest can be maintained. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the form in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51 which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 was exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a display area other than the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a sub-image display device provided separately from the image display device 5). good too.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the component assembly effect to a plurality of effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 and PT2-1 in which the type of the component image and the change in the display mode of the component image are different. It is made executable based on any one of ∼3.

In the effect pattern PT1-1, the part images ZC1 to ZC3 of the push button 31B change step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon, but finally the part images ZC4 and ZC5 are not displayed and are gathered. is a pattern of failure. The effect pattern PT1-2 changes step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed and the assembly is successful. It's a pattern. The effect patterns PT1-3 change step by step in the order of the common silhouette, the individual silhouette, and the icon (effect mode) for the part images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed. It is the pattern that aggregation succeeds.

In the effect pattern PT2-1, the part images ZA1 to ZA3 of the stick controller 31A change step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon, but finally the part images ZA4 and ZA5 are not displayed and are aggregated. is a pattern of failure. The production pattern PT2-2 changes step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, and finally all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed and the gathering is successful. It's a pattern. Effect patterns PT2-3 change step by step in the order of common silhouettes, individual silhouettes, and icons (effect modes) for component images ZA1 to ZA5 of stick controller 31A, and finally all component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed. It is the pattern that aggregation succeeds.

After completing the operation promotion effect pattern determination processing of 063SGS279 in FIG. Make a decision.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10(B), the effect control CPU 120 determines which of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is to be operated for the operation promotion effect in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279. Depending on the number, one of a plurality of component set effect patterns is determined.

Specifically, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target for the operation promoting effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 3%. , the performance pattern PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, the performance pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 7%, the performance pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the performance pattern PT2-2 is determined at 30%. %, and the performance pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 40%.

On the other hand, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the effect pattern is determined. PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, performance pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, performance pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 7%, and performance pattern PT2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , and the performance pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

When the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the parts assembly performance, it sets a parts assembly performance execution determination flag and stores the determined types of performance patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 in the RAM122. Note that the above determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target for the operation promoting effect, the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed by the push button 31B. is determined at a rate higher than that of the production patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 that display the part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to , and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target for the operation promotion production. Effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 displaying the corresponding part images ZC1 to ZC5 are determined at a higher rate than the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A. do.

In this way, the component assembly effect determines whether the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect is the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3, that is, whether the operation object in the operation promotion effect is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. This is an effect that suggests by stepwise displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3.

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promoting effect, it is highly likely that execution of the controller assembly effect is determined, so all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed. Effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 that are successfully assembled are determined at a higher rate than the effect pattern PT2-1 that is unsuccessfully assembled. In other words, when the assembly success part assembly presentation based on the presentation patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, the operation rate is higher than when the assembly failure parts assembly presentation is executed based on the presentation pattern PT2-1. In the promotion effect, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect.

Further, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promoting effect, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to gather are replaced by the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2- that succeed in gathering. 2 and 2-3, the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation prompting effect when the component assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to be assembled is executed. likely to

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promoting effect, there is a high possibility that the result of the variable display is a big hit. When the execution ratio increases in the order of PT2-2 and PT2-3, and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, there is a high possibility that the variable display result is a failure, so the effect pattern PT2-3. , PT2-2, PT2-1, PT1-3, PT1-2, and PT1-1. Therefore, the performance patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3, PT2-1, PT2-2, and PT2-3 are set so as to increase the reliability (expectation) of the big hit.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target for the operation promoting effect, execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a higher rate than when the push button 31B is determined. is determined, the variable display result is a failure, or even if the execution of the controller assembly effect has not been determined, the execution may be determined.

Further, in the characteristic portion 063SG, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 (specific effect images) displayed in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect is the specific display mode (all When the display mode changes to a group success display mode in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed), the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the specific display mode is not set. Although the form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the operation of the stick controller 31A is set to be promoted in the operation promotion effect when the specific display mode is entered. The effect may be set so that the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted.

Returning to FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120, after executing the parts set effect pattern determination process at 063SGS280, determines whether or not the parts set effect execution flag is set (063SGS281). When the parts assembly performance execution flag is set, the parts assembly performance start waiting timer is set to the time until the parts assembly performance start start (063SGS282), the parts assembly performance execution determination flag is set, and the parts assembly performance execution flag is set. (063SGS283). In addition, when the part assembly effect execution flag is not set in 063SGS281, the process proceeds to 063SGS284 as it is. Then, an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the content determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process is selected (063SGS284), and the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (063SGS285).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (063SGS286). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (063SGS287). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (063SGS288). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (063SGS289).

FIG. 8-12 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (063SGS301, 063SGS302, 063SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect is set (it is decided to perform the notice effect) or the flag during execution of the notice effect is set (during the execution of the notice effect). Yes), the notice effect process may be executed.

In 063SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (063SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (063SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (063SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance (063SGS309b).

Next, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 promotes the operation based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. A process for executing an effect is performed (063SGS310). In addition, when execution of the parts set effect is determined in the parts set effect pattern determination process of 063SGS280, the parts set effect is executed based on the determined effect pattern at the execution timing of the parts set effect ( 063 SGS310a). Further, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination processing of 063SGS279, the operation promotion effect is executed based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. (063 SGS310).

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (063SGS311). When the variable display control timer has timed out (063SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). Image data for the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (063SGS312). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to a predetermined value (063SGS313).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (063SGS311; N), after executing 063SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (063SGS314). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (063SGS315; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the processing of 063SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table is finish.

(Fire operation promotion production)
The effect control CPU 120 shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path K2 when the big hit game state or the time saving state is started in the shooting operation promotion effect processing of 063SGS162 shown in FIG. 8-7. A shooting operation promotion performance A and a shooting operation promotion performance B prompting the player to do so are executed. In addition, when the time-saving state ends and is controlled to the normal game state (low probability low base state), a left-handed notification prompting the game ball to be shot so that the game ball flows down the first path K1. Execute.

An example of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the jackpot game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21. FIG. 8-20 is a timing chart explaining an example of the effect in the jackpot game state. FIG. 8-21 is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects from the start of the jackpot game state to the normal game state via the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the display result of the variable display in the normal game state (or time saving state) is a big hit (for example, a non-probable variable big hit) (see FIG. 8-21 (A)), for production control The CPU 120 starts a jackpot start effect (fanfare effect) at timing Ta0 when an effect control command designating the start of a big hit game state is received in the special figure win waiting process of 063SGS173 shown in FIG. 8-7. In a fanfare period (execution period of pre-processing for opening a big win) from a timing Ta0 at which a performance control command is received to a timing Ta2 at which a round game is started, first, after executing a big win start performance indicating that a big win has occurred, a big win is won. At a timing Ta1 when a predetermined time has passed after the start effect is started, a shooting operation promotion effect A is started to prompt the game ball to be shot so that the game ball flows down the second path K2 (see FIG. 8-22). ).

In the shooting operation promotion effect A, after the handle assembly effect described later is executed, a right-hand shot operation is notified during the period from the timing Ta2 when the handle assembly effect ends to the timing Ta3 when the round game is started. I do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the big hit (performance during the round) in the round game period (execution period of the process during the opening of the big win) from the timing Ta2 when the fanfare period ends to the timing Ta4 when the round game ends ( (See Fig. 8-21(B)). Then, in the ending period (execution period of processing after opening the big win) from the timing Ta4 when the round game period ends to the timing Ta7 when the big win game state ends, first, the big win ends and the time saving state (chance time) is entered. After executing the big hit end effect indicating that (see FIG. 8-21 (C)), at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the mid-round effect, the game ball flows down the second path K2. A shooting operation prompting effect B for prompting shooting of the game ball is started (see FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24).

In the shooting operation promotion effect B, after executing the path assembly effect described later, a right hitting operation is notified during a period from timing Ta6 when the path setting effect ends to timing Ta7 when the jackpot game state ends. I do.

In addition, the time-saving state (low probability base state), the effect image Z10 corresponding to the time saving state, the variable display image Z11 of the decoration pattern, the remaining fluctuation number image Z12 of the time saving state, and the notification image Z13 consisting of "right hitting" and "→" indicating right hitting. and are displayed (see FIG. 8-21(D)).

At the timing Ta8 when the 100th variable display is completed from the end of the jackpot game state, after displaying the notification image Z14 indicating that the time saving state has ended (see FIG. 8-21 (E)), a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing Ta8. Until timing Ta9 elapses, "Please return to left-handed hitting", "←" and the hitting ball operation handle to prompt the game ball to be shot (return to left-handed hitting) so that the game ball flows down the first path K1 A notification image Z15 consisting of a steering wheel image simulating 30 is displayed, and a left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is performed by outputting a voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting" from the speakers 8L and 8R (Fig. 8-21 (F)).

In addition, in this feature part 063SG, although the case where it is controlled to the low probability high base state after the end of the non-probability variable jackpot has been described, even if it is controlled to the high probability high base state after the end of the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B At the start of the big win, the shooting operation promotion performance A is executed, and at the end of the big win, the shooting operation promotion performance B is executed, but even if the 100th variable display is completed without the occurrence of the big win from the end of the big win game state. Since the high-precision high base state continues, the left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is not performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the steering wheel assembly effect, which will be described later, when performing the left-hand hitting notification (left-hand hitting operation promoting effect).

(Handle assembly performance)
Next, the handle assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 8-22. 8-22, (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the handle assembly effect in the firing operation prompting effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing the notification of hitting to the right.

The ball-striking operation handle 30 is composed of a plurality of parts (members), as explained with reference to FIG. The effect is to display the component images ZB1 to ZB4 to be assembled.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E), the part image ZB1 corresponding to the part B1 is attached to the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the glass door frame of the gaming machine frame 3. After displaying in the mode, the part image ZB2 corresponding to the part B2 is displayed on the part image ZB1 in the mode of assembling, the part image ZB3 corresponding to the part B3 is displayed on the part image ZB1 in the mode of assembling, and the part By displaying the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 to the image ZB1 in a manner in which it is assembled, the complete image ZB5 of the ball-hitting operation handle 30 using all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 is finally displayed. be.

In the notification of hitting to the right, a handle image Z17 for rotating the hitting operation handle 30 in the right direction and a right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow displaying text information "Hit right!" are displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output a voice saying "Please hit right". Note that the effect control CPU 120 displays a right arrow image Z5 for prompting right hitting during execution of the steering wheel assembly effect and right hitting notification.

Also, the assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in these handle assembly presentations will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the assembly order is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process, the production effect can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in the steering wheel assembly presentation may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are images that do not include some of the multiple components (members) constituting the ball-hitting handle 30. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the part image ZB1 corresponding to the part B1 (handle base 720) includes wiring C, connector CN and touch ring 728 that the actual handle base 720 has, a handle sensor (not shown), Since the display of the electronic component images corresponding to the electronic components such as the one-shot switch 725 is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 is spoiled by the component images corresponding to the components such as the wiring C and the connector CN. can be suppressed. It should be noted that display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Also, in the handle assembly effect, the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4, which is more characteristic than the parts B1 to B3, is displayed in a manner in which it is assembled after the part images ZB1 to ZB3. , and by displaying the parts image ZB4, which is the easiest to recognize as the ball-hitting operation handle 30, at the end, it is possible to make it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. improves.

Furthermore, the component image ZB4 may be displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the other component images ZB1 to ZB3. Specifically, the mode in which the visibility of the component image ZB4 is higher for the player than the other component images ZB1 to ZB3 is, for example, when the component image ZB4 is displayed in an assembly mode, the component image ZB4 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or the component image ZB4 is displayed in an enlarged manner. An effect image is displayed around the image ZB4 to emphasize the image, or the display area of the image display device 5 is moved from the periphery toward the center. Includes aspects that make it easy to identify parts. By displaying in this manner, the production effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the steering wheel assembling effect is to assemble the part images ZB1 to ZB4 to the door frame image Z16 in a manner other than the above procedure, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner in which the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are assembled to the door frame image Z16 in the above order. and an effect pattern to be displayed in a mode.

Also, in the handle assembling effect, all the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 are not used, and the assembly fails, and after displaying the unfinished image of the ball-striking operation handle 30, the assembly is started again and the completed image ZB5 is displayed. You may make it

(Route assembly production)
Next, the route assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 8-23. 8-23 are diagrams for explaining the flow of the path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect B (A) to (F). 8-24, (G) to (K) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the game ball flowing effect in the shooting operation promotion effect B, and (L) is a diagram showing right-handed notification.

The second path K2 is configured by arranging a plurality of parts (members) on the game board 2 and on the game board 2, as described with reference to FIG. 8-1. 2, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 respectively corresponding to the four parts D1 to D4 out of the plurality of parts including . In the following, the part constituting the special variable winning ball device 7 is the part D1, the part constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is the part D2, the part constituting the passage gate 41 is the part D3, and the part of the second path K2 is A passage component (passage member) to be formed will be referred to as a component D4 and will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image ZD1 corresponding to the component D1 in a manner in which it is attached to the game board image Z20, A part image ZD2 corresponding to the part D2 is displayed on the game board image Z20 in a manner of assembling, a part image ZD3 corresponding to the part D3 is displayed on the game board image Z20, and a part image ZD3 corresponding to the part D3 is displayed on the game board image Z20. By displaying the component image ZD4 corresponding to D4 in a manner in which it is assembled, the route image corresponding to the second route K2 (for example, at least a part of the game board image Z20 and the component images ZD1 to ZD4 can be used. This is an effect that displays the route image).

In addition, the assembly order of the part images ZD1 to ZD4 in these path assembly presentations is the actual assembly process in the manufacturing process, in order to display the presentation in an easy-to-understand manner for the player to see that the second path K2 is being assembled. Since the order is different from the order, the production effect can be enhanced. Incidentally, the assembly order of the part images ZD1 to ZD4 in the path assembly rendering may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Furthermore, the component D4 {passage component (passage member)} is actually formed integrally with the center decorative frame 5c, but in the route assembly effect, it is a component formed separately from the center decorative frame 5c. By being displayed as image ZD4, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are images that do not include some of the multiple components (members) forming the second route K2. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, part image ZD1 corresponding to part D1 (special variable winning ball device 7), part image ZD2 corresponding to part D2 (variable winning ball device 6B), part D3 (passage gate 41 ), the display of electronic component images corresponding to electronic components such as solenoids, switches, wires, connectors, etc. actually possessed by each component is omitted (not displayed). It is possible to prevent the appearance of the ZD4 from being spoiled by parts images corresponding to parts such as solenoids, switches, wires, connectors, and the like. It should be noted that display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

In addition, in the route assembly presentation, the component image ZC4 corresponding to the component D4, which is more characteristic than the components D1 to D3, is displayed in a manner in which it is assembled after the component images ZD1 to ZD3, making it suitable for the second route K2. , and the part image ZD4, which is the easiest to recognize as the second route K2, is displayed last, making it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. improves. The “characteristic part” is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a passage part (passage member) that constitutes a part of the second route K2.

Specifically, the part D4 (passage member) is A.D. B. being a member constituting a path along which game balls flow; B. a shape that is easy to remember as a path; D. being larger than the other parts D1 to D3 (the area occupied by the entire second path K2 is large); E. The part must be arranged in a conspicuous position for the player; It includes parts and the like that satisfy at least one condition (for example, conditions A and B here) of being a device that a player aims to win. Therefore, for example, if the player is to be encouraged to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B, the component image ZD2 is displayed as a characteristic component in such a manner that it is assembled after the component images ZD1, ZD3, and ZD4. can be

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the game board 2 (game area Y) has a model-specific part unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game board image Z20 corresponding to such a game board 2, When the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame is displayed in the route assembly presentation or the handle assembly presentation, it is preferable to display at least part of the model-specific portion.

The model-specific portion includes a game information display portion that displays game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the number of winning balls, the probability of a big hit, the model name (title name), etc.), an obstacle nail, a windmill, etc. obstacles, movable bodies for presentation, decorative parts, etc., which are provided in the game area Y so as to be visible to the player. Therefore, when these are displayed in the route assembly effect, they correspond to the pachinko game machine 1, but the model name (title name) is the same, but the game performance (specifications) such as the number of prize balls and the probability of big wins are different. When a pachinko machine or another pachinko machine with a different model name (title name) executes a route assembly effect, information different from the actual one is provided to the player, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Assembly performance cannot be used in common for a plurality of types of pachinko game machines.

However, as shown in FIG. 8-23(E), when displaying the game information image Z21 corresponding to the game information display portion in which the number of prize balls, the probability of a big hit, the model name (title name), etc. are displayed, By displaying the game information in a manner that makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to specify (for example, not displaying, blurring, or painting out), it is possible to execute the same route assembly performance among a plurality of types of models.

In addition, the route assembly effect includes the component images ZD1 to ZD4 being assembled to the game board image Z20 in a manner other than the above procedure, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20 in the above order. and an effect pattern to be displayed in a mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a path assembly effect for displaying a mode of assembling the part image ZD4 to the game board image Z20, and after displaying the character image Z22 as shown in FIG. 8-23(F), As shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J), a route image corresponding to the second route K2 is displayed so that the player can recognize it, and the route image is displayed in a manner in which game balls flow down. Start the streaming performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (G), an image in which the game ball moves toward the right side is displayed above the game area Y, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (H), the game area Y 8-24(I), the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and moves toward the variable winning ball device 6B. is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-24(J), an image is displayed in which the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result, the player can be recognizably notified that the game ball can pass through the passage gate 41 and win the variable winning ball device 6B by striking to the right. When displaying the image in which these game balls move, an arrow image Z6 indicating the flow path of the game ball is displayed in addition to the game ball.

Incidentally, the game board image Z20 shown in FIG. 8-24(G) is a movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32 which would otherwise be a model-specific part (for example, the shaded area in FIG. 8-24(G)). ), but the movable body 32 is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to identify it (for example, a blurred image or a deformed image of the movable body 32). Further, the display of the movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32, which is the model-specific part, may be omitted, or the display of only the characteristic parts may be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-24(K), after the character image Z22 is displayed, as shown in FIG. An image Z17, a right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow displayed with character information "Right shot!" Output. Note that the effect control CPU 120 displays a right arrow image Z5 for prompting a right hit during execution of the path assembly effect and the right hit information.

Thus, in the shooting operation promotion effect A and the shooting operation promotion effect B, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. By displaying the steering wheel image Z17 and the right arrow image Z18, not only is the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) performed, but the steering wheel is operated before the right-handed notification, that is, before the right-handed operation is started. By performing the assembly effect and the path assembly effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right hitting operation and the second path K2 along which the game ball flows down due to the right hitting. It is possible to inform in advance that a player or the like who is inexperienced in playing the ball will need a right-handed operation. Furthermore, instead of displaying the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) image shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. Since it is possible to make the player aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

In addition, it is conceivable to set a long jackpot fanfare period or ending period in advance so that the player does not get a large number of balls in a short time. ) or setting a long execution period of the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. However, by setting the execution of the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect as the firing operation promoting effect A and the firing operation promoting effect B, it is possible to prevent the firing operation promoting effect from appearing to be dull. It is possible to appropriately notify that the start timing of the hitting operation has arrived.

In addition, by setting the execution period of the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion presentation) long, the player is fully aware of the start timing of the right-hand hitting operation even without performing the steering wheel assembly performance and the path assembly performance. However, if the right-throwing notification image is displayed before the right-throwing operation start timing, the right-throwing operation is started before the right-throwing operation start timing, and the player wastes hitting. However, by executing the steering wheel assembling effect and the path assembling effect, it is possible to start the right-handed operation at a suitable timing while making the player aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation.

(First Invention)
As described above, the characteristic portion 063SG includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that allows a game to be played by shooting a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area The game ball has a first route and a second route different from the first route, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the game ball flows down the second route and becomes more advantageous than flowing down the first route. (Time-saving state, etc.), before the advantageous state starts, promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path is possible. There were things. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, the attraction is not improved because the promotional effect is monotonous by only prompting the shooting of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a shooting operation unit (for example, a ball hitting operation handle 30) for performing a game medium shooting operation;
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The firing operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4),
The promotion effect executing means, in the promotion effect, a first component image (eg, component image ZB1) related to the first component and a second component image (eg, component image ZB4) related to the second component. is displayed, and a specific component image (for example, a complete image ZB5, etc.) using at least a part of the first component image and the second component image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the handle In the assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZB1 to ZB4 in the form of assembly, a portion that can finally display a completed image ZB5 of the ball hitting operation handle 30 using all the part images ZB1 to ZB4. -22 (A) ~ (E) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the firing operation section, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for performing the ball hitting operation, the player can perform the right hitting operation without panicking when the start timing of the right hitting operation comes.
In addition, in the steering wheel assembly presentation, by displaying the part images ZB1 to ZB4, that is, by displaying an unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that it is not time to start the right-handed operation. By displaying the complete image ZB5 in which these component images are finally assembled, the right-hand hitting operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The game machine of means 2 of the first invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a shooting operation unit (for example, a ball hitting operation handle 30) for performing a game medium shooting operation;
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The firing operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4),
The promotion effect executing means can sequentially display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can , In the steering wheel assembly effect, a portion that displays the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 in a manner in which they are assembled sequentially (see FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the firing operation section, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for performing the ball hitting operation, the player can perform the right hitting operation without panicking when the start timing of the right hitting operation comes.
In addition, in the steering wheel assembly effect, the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in order, that is, the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 are individually displayed and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the right-handed operation is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying the completed image ZB5 in which these component images are finally assembled, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The plurality of parts includes third parts (for example, electronic parts such as wiring C, connector CN and touch ring 728 of handle base 720, handle sensor (not shown), single switch 725),
The promotion effect executing means does not display the third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the part B1 (handle base 720) in the handle assembly effect. The component image ZB1 omits display of electronic component images corresponding to electronic components such as the wiring C, the connector CN, the touch ring 728, the handle sensor (not shown), the one-shot switch 725, etc. that the actual handlebar base 720 has ( not shown) part.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The second part (e.g., part B4) is a more characteristic part than the first part (e.g., part B1),
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second component image after the first component image in the steering wheel assembly effect). A part that displays a part image ZB4 corresponding to a part B4 in a manner that it is assembled after the part images ZB1 to ZB3.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the performance effect.
More specifically, it is possible to inform the player that the assembly of the ball hitting operation handle 30 has been completed, that is, that it is time to start the right-hand hitting operation in an easy-to-understand display mode for the player.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) includes a model-specific part (for example, game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ), etc.), obstacles such as obstacle nails and windmills, movable objects for production, decorative parts, etc.),
The promotion effect executing means may display a game area image related to the game area in the promotion effect. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2, the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame, etc. in the path assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least part of the model-specific part is omitted and displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the same promotion effect among a plurality of types of machine models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same path assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on game machines of different models without giving a sense of incompatibility to the player. be able to run.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect that prompts the player to shoot the game media so that the game media flow down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the time saving state has ended, left-handed information can be executed, see Fig. 8-21 (F)),
The first component image and the second component image are not displayed in the special promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state The part that does not execute the steering wheel assembly effect before doing (see Fig. 8-21 (F))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness.
Specifically, when the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player (for example, a big win game state, a time saving state, etc.), the handle assembly effect or the path assembly effect is performed, while the state is controlled from the state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous state. The player can be made to recognize that the game state has changed by not performing the steering wheel assembling effect or the path assembling effect when the game is played.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The promotion effect execution means displays the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect in a manner in which they are assembled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the plurality of images constituting the hitting operation handle 30). A portion capable of executing a steering wheel assembling presentation that displays part images ZB1 to ZB4 corresponding to four parts B1 to B4 of the parts, respectively, in an assembling manner.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible not only to show a plurality of parts images, but also to suitably inform the player that it is time to start the right-handed operation when the ball-striking operation handle 30 is completed by assembly.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 7,
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure,
The promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled in a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the component image ZB1 in the steering wheel assembly effect). The assembly order of ZB4 is the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process described with reference to FIGS. are in a different order.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, it can be presented in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 7 or 8,
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means displays the first component image and the second component image in a combination mode, and then causes the game medium to fire the operation component image corresponding to the shooting operation unit. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect, the hitting operation handle as shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. 8-24 (L) A portion for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that the player 30 is rotated rightward.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, it is possible to provide the player with a more comprehensible indication that it is time to start the right-handed operation.

(Second invention)
In addition, the characteristic portion 063SG includes a second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that allows a game to be played by shooting a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area The game ball has a first route and a second route different from the first route, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the game ball flows down the second route and becomes more advantageous than flowing down the first route. (Time-saving state, etc.), before the advantageous state starts, promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path is possible. There were things. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, the attraction is not improved because the promotional effect is monotonous by only prompting the shooting of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (eg, game board 2) and second parts (eg, parts D1 to D4),
The promotion effect executing means, in the promotion effect, performs a first component image related to the first component (eg, game board image Z20) and a second component image related to the second component (eg, component images ZD1 to ZD1). ZD4), and a specific component image (for example, a route image, etc.) using at least a part of the first component image and the second component image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , in the route assembly effect, by displaying the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in a manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20, a route image corresponding to the second route K2 (for example, the game board image Z20 and the component image ZD1 A part that can display a route image using at least a part of ~ ZD4 (see FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the second route, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the path assembly effect before executing the right hitting notification (right hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the second path K2 along which the game ball flows down, the player can perform the right-handed operation without panicking when the right-handed operation start timing comes. Become.
In addition, in the route assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZD1 to ZD4, that is, by displaying an unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that it is not time to start the right-handed operation. By displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (eg, game board 2) and second parts (eg, parts D1 to D4),
The promotion effect executing means can sequentially display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can , A portion for displaying the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in a manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially assembled (see FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the firing operation section, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the path assembly effect before executing the right-handed hitting notification (right-handed hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for performing the ball hitting operation, the player can perform the right hitting operation without panicking when the start timing of the right hitting operation comes.
In addition, in the route assembly effect, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in order, that is, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are individually displayed and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the right-handed operation is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The plurality of parts includes third parts (for example, electronic parts such as solenoids, switches, wiring, connectors, etc.),
The promotion effect executing means does not display the third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image ZD1 corresponding to the parts D1 to D4 in the route assembly effect). ∼ ZD4 and game board image Z20 are portions where display of electronic component images corresponding to electronic components such as solenoids, switches, wires, connectors, etc. actually possessed by each component is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The second part is a part more characteristic than the first part,
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image more characteristic than the parts D1 to D3 in the route assembly effect). A part that displays a part image ZD4 corresponding to a particular part D4 in such a manner that the part image ZD4 is assembled after the part images ZD1 to ZD3.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the performance effect.
Specifically, it is possible to inform the player that the assembly of the second path K2 has been completed, that is, that it is time to start the right-handed operation in a display manner that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) includes a model-specific part (for example, game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ), etc.), obstacles such as obstacle nails and windmills, movable objects for production, decorative parts, etc.),
The promotion effect executing means may display a game area image related to the game area in the promotion effect. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2, the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame, etc. in the path assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least part of the model-specific part is omitted and displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the same promotion effect among a plurality of types of machine models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same path assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on game machines of different models without giving a sense of incompatibility to the player. be able to run.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect that encourages shooting the game medium so that the game medium flows down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the time saving state has ended, left-handed information executable part.),
The first component image and the second component image are not displayed in the special promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state The part that does not execute the steering wheel assembly effect before doing (see Fig. 8-21 (F))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness.
Specifically, when the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state, a time saving state, etc.), the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect is performed, while the state is controlled from the state advantageous to the player to the state disadvantageous. The player can be made to recognize that the game state has changed by not performing the steering wheel assembling effect or the path assembling effect when it is done.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The plurality of parts include a common part (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) through which both the game medium flowing down the first path and the game medium flowing down the second path can pass. ,
The promotion effect executing means can display a common part image corresponding to the common part (for example, a part image corresponding to the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) in the promotion effect (modification).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect including parts common to the first route and the second route.
Specifically, for example, like the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. can also be used for route construction production.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
After the promotion effect executing means executes the promotion effect, a second route image corresponding to the second route is displayed so that the player can recognize it, and a game medium flows down the second route image. It can be displayed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the route assembly effect, a route image corresponding to the second route K2 is displayed to the player as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J) A portion capable of executing a flow-down effect in which the path image is displayed in a recognizable manner and the game ball flows down.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, the player can be urged to perform an operation to launch a game ball onto the second path K2 assembled in the path assembly presentation.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means displays the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are combined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the plurality of images constituting the second route K2). A portion capable of executing a route assembly rendering that displays part images ZD1 to ZD4 corresponding to four parts D1 to D4 of the parts, respectively, in a manner in which they are assembled.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, not only is it possible to show a plurality of component images, but also the completion of the second path K2 by assembling can suitably notify the player that it is time to start the right-handed operation.

The gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 9,
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure,
The promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled in a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the component image ZD1 in the route assembly effect). The assembly order of ZD4 is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process, in order to make it easy for the player to understand that the second route K2 is being assembled. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, it can be presented in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 11 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 9 or 10,
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled, and then causes the game medium to fire the operation component image corresponding to the shooting operation unit. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect, the hitting operation handle as shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. 8-24 (L) A portion for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that the player 30 is rotated rightward.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, it is possible to provide the player with a more comprehensible indication that it is time to start the right-handed operation.

(Third invention)
In addition, the characteristic portion 063SG includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, in a game machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-15392, etc. For example, before the operation effective period of the chance button as a predetermined member starts, a transparent button image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving the display toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two transparent images of the button overlap in the center, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button has started. There were things to do. The game machine described in the above patent publication has the problem that it is not possible to further improve the amusement. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Provided with a predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32 etc.),
The predetermined member is a plurality of parts (for example, parts A1 to A5) including a first part (for example, part A1), a second part (for example, part A5), and a third part (for example, part A2) configured,
When the predetermined member becomes usable, it is possible to display a predetermined member image related to the predetermined member (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image shown in FIG. 8-19 (A) or FIG. As shown in (B), when the operation valid period starts, the part that performs the operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3.),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component are displayed, and a third component image related to the third component is displayed. is not displayed (for example, the production control CPU 120, in the controller assembly production, for the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 (back base 604), the wiring C and connector CN that the actual back base 604 has, the controller sensor unit 35A and A part where display of component images corresponding to electronic components such as the push sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the predetermined member, thereby enhancing interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, gripping members 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the actions of the player,
Equipped with a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that encourages the action of the player (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B),
The promotion effect executing means is capable of displaying the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display five parts among a plurality of parts in the controller assembly effect). A part that displays parts images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the promotion production.
By performing the controller assembly effect, it is possible to make the player fully aware of the stick controller 31A to be operated before the effective period of operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is started. The player can operate without panicking when the start timing of the operation valid period comes.
In addition, in the controller assembly effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed individually and the completed image is not displayed, so that the start timing of the operation effective period is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined member (for example, movable body 32) is operable,
When the first component image and the second component image are displayed, the predetermined member can be operated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). A parts image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and a parts image ZE1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. Next, FIG. As shown in 8-30(B), the controller assembly presentation and the movable body assembly presentation are progressed together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position.Modification 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be appropriately focused.
Specifically, the player's expectation of the movable body 32 moving to the performance position can be preferably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.例文帳に追加

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (eg, stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (eg, push button 31B),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting which of the first predetermined member and the second predetermined member the predetermined member image related to is to be displayed (for example, for effect control). A part in which the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggesting effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled to enable operation in the super ready-to-win effect, etc. See Modified Example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, interest is improved.
More specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's sense of anticipation regarding which operation of the operation member will be valid before the operation valid period starts.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembled manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A part that can execute a controller assembly effect that displays part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to five parts A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, not only is it possible to show a plurality of component images, but also by completing the assembly of the stick controller 31A, it is possible to suitably notify the player that it is time to start the valid operation period.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 5,
a first display pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled;
a second pattern that displays the first component image and the second component image in a non-assembled manner;
(For example, the production control CPU 120 displays the completed controller image Z1 and effect patterns C and D that do not display the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component image ZA5 in a manner not assembled to the component image ZA1. A part that can execute assembly effects (see Figure 8-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of anticipation for completing the assembly by assembling all the parts.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Before displaying a plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component images used for the assembly (for example, A portion that can execute an assembly suggestive effect for displaying in a mode of collecting parts images to be assembled in the controller assembly effect, such as during a super ready-to-win effect before executing the controller assembly effect, see modified example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for completion of the assembly by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

(Fourth invention)
In addition, the characteristic portion 063SG includes a fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, in a game machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-15392, etc. For example, before the operation effective period of the chance button as a predetermined member starts, a transparent button image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving the display toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two transparent images of the button overlap in the center, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button has started. There were things to do. The game machine described in the above patent publication has the problem that it is not possible to further improve the amusement. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Provided with a predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32 etc.),
The predetermined member is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (e.g., part A1) and a second part (e.g., part A5) more characteristic than the first part,
When the predetermined member becomes usable, it is possible to display a predetermined member image related to the predetermined member (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image shown in FIG. 8-19 (A) or FIG. As shown in (B), when the operation valid period starts, the part that performs the operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3.),
before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component;
The second component image is displayed after the first component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in order in the effect pattern B, and As shown in (E), (F), and (G), a portion displaying a part image ZA5 corresponding to a part A5 that is more characteristic than parts A1 to A4 is assembled after the part images ZA1 to ZA4. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the predetermined member, thereby enhancing interest.
Specifically, it is possible to inform the player that the assembly of the stick controller 31A has been completed, that is, that the start timing of the valid operation period has come, in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When displaying the second component image, it is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the component images related to other components (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the image shown in FIG. 8-18 (E). As shown, when the component image ZA5 is displayed in a manner in which it is assembled with the component image ZA1, the component image ZA5 can be displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image can be displayed around the component image ZA5, and an image display can be performed. Parts that are displayed in a manner that allows the player to more easily identify the parts than the other parts images ZA1 to ZA4, such as moving and displaying from the periphery of the display area of the device 5 toward the center.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, gripping members 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the actions of the player,
Equipped with a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that encourages the action of the player (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B),
The promotion effect executing means is capable of displaying the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display five parts among a plurality of parts in the controller assembly effect). A part that displays parts images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the promotion production.
Specifically, by executing the controller assembly effect before executing the operation prompting notification shown in FIGS. By making it possible for the player to be sufficiently aware of the stick controller 31A to be operated, the player can operate the stick controller 31A without panicking when the start timing of the valid operation period comes. Become.
In addition, in the controller assembly effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed individually and the completed image is not displayed, so that the start timing of the operation effective period is not reached. By displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the player can start the operation at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined member (for example, movable body 32) is operable,
When the first component image and the second component image are displayed, the predetermined member can be operated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). A parts image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and a parts image ZD1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. Next, FIG. As shown in 8-30(B), the controller assembly presentation and the movable body assembly presentation are progressed together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position.Modification 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be appropriately focused.
Specifically, the player's expectation of the movable body 32 moving to the performance position can be preferably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.例文帳に追加

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (eg, stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (eg, push button 31B),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting which of the first predetermined member and the second predetermined member the predetermined member image related to is to be displayed (for example, for effect control). A part in which the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggesting effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled to enable operation in the super ready-to-win effect, etc. See Modified Example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, interest is improved.
More specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's sense of anticipation regarding which operation of the operation member will be valid before the operation valid period starts.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembled manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A part that can execute a controller assembly effect that displays part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to five parts A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, not only is it possible to show a plurality of component images, but also by completing the assembly of the stick controller 31A, it is possible to suitably notify the player that it is time to start the valid operation period.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 6,
a first display pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled;
a second pattern that displays the first component image and the second component image in a non-assembled manner;
(For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in a manner in which the component images ZA2 to ZA5 are assembled to the component image ZA1 in the controller assembly effect. controller assembling effects based on either one of performance patterns A and B where the component image ZA5 is displayed in a state in which the component image ZA5 is not assembled to the component image ZA1 so that the completed controller image Z1 is not displayed. (See Figure 8-9 (C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of anticipation for completing the assembly by assembling all the parts.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
Before displaying a plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component images used for the assembly (for example, During the super ready-to-win effect before executing the controller assembly effect, etc., a portion where it is possible to execute a parts assembly effect in which images of parts to be assembled in the controller assembly effect are displayed in a manner of collecting them, see Modified Example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for completion of the assembly by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the operation prompting effect, the form of executing the controller assembly effect of assembling the stick controller 31A has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the controller assembly effect , a push button assembling effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executable. Either one of the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect may be selected and executed, or both the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect may be started together. When one of the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect is selected and executed, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller assembly effect is selected at a higher rate than the push button assembly effect, and the operation target is selected. is the push button 31B, it is preferable to select the push button assembly effect at a higher rate than the controller assembly effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation prompting effect including the controller assembly effect has been exemplified at the timing to determine the result of the battle effect in Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. , timing to notify whether or not re-variation will be executed in pseudo-continuous performance, various timings in advance notice performance that suggests the possibility of a big hit, and timing to notify whether or not to be promoted to probability variable big hit in promotion performance Or, the timing of notifying whether the round continues during the big hit, and the timing of notifying whether the game ball passes through the variable probability switch and is controlled to the probability variable state during the big hit, etc. It can be executed at any timing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation prompting effect including the controller assembly effect has two operation units, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, as operation targets, and the operation unit that is activated among the two operation units However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of three or more types of operation units other than the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B as the operation target. Alternatively, only one of the operation sections may be targeted.

(Modification 1)
Further, as described above, when it is not possible to know which of the two operation units, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, to be operated is effective, for example, in the assembly effect, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B It is also possible to make it possible to execute an assembly effect in which it is difficult to specify which of the buttons 31B is assembled to enable the operation. Modification 1 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-25. 8-25, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an assembly effect in Modification 1 of the present characteristic portion 063SG.

In the assembly effect in the operation promotion effect as Modified Example 1 of the present characteristic portion 063SG, as shown in FIG. ) As shown in FIG. 8-25(D), the component image Z30 that is difficult to identify is displayed in a manner in which the component corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25(D). 8-25(E) and (F), the part corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be identified as the assembly progresses. If the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller image Z1 is displayed in a manner in which the final assembly is performed. abbreviated) is possible.

In addition, in the present modification 1, as a display mode of the component image Z30 for making it difficult to specify the operation target, it is displayed in a black circle form having a character "?" ), displaying parts in silhouette (Fig. 8-25 (D), etc.), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the part image is mosaiced or the external shape of the part is deformed. Alternatively, various display modes other than the above may be adopted, such as lowering the brightness of the image display device 5 . Further, while the visibility is being lowered near the completion of assembly, the parts may be colored or affixed with a sticker, and then the parts may be displayed in color along with the display of the effect image to complete the assembly.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which a component assembly effect that suggests which operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid in the operation promotion effect can be executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a parts assembly effect as an assembly suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that a controller assembly effect will be executed. Modification 2 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-26. 8-26, (A) to (E) are diagrams showing the super ready-to-win effect in Modified Example 2 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (E), for example, during the Super Reach effect before executing the controller assembly effect, parts displayed in a manner in which images of the parts to be assembled in the controller assembly effect are collected. It may also be possible to execute collective performance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), a part image Z31 corresponding to each of a plurality of parts constituting an operation target to be assembled in the assembly presentation is displayed so that it is difficult to identify which part it is. Displayed in a form (for example, displayed in a form with a character "?" in front of the silhouette of the part), as shown in Figs. is displayed (fade-in display) in a manner that changes to an identifiable manner, the operation object to be assembled in the assembly presentation becomes clear in stages, thereby attracting the player's interest.

The timing for changing the component image Z31 to an identifiable mode may be a predetermined timing, a timing linked to the chance-up effect in the super ready-to-win effect, or a Various timings, such as the timing at which a specific mode of operation (for example, a long press for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined number of button operations, etc.) is performed during a specific period in which the promotion effect for prompting the operation is not executed, may be used. .

In addition, in the assembly suggestion presentation, as shown in FIG. 8-26(D), finally all the part images Z31 may be displayed so as to be identifiable, or as shown in FIG. 8-26(E) , finally, only a part of the component image Z31 may be displayed so as to be identifiable. When all the part images Z31 are finally displayed so as to be identifiable, the effect patterns A and B for completing the assembly are likely to be executed in the controller assembly effect, and finally only part of the part images Z31 are displayed so as to be identifiable. If it is done, the effect patterns C and D in which the assembly is not completed in the controller assembly effect can be easily executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in other effects (for example, a look-ahead effect or advance notice effect related to the pending memory display) during the execution period of the assembly suggestion effect. may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity due to the promotion performance of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B which are not assembled during the execution period of the assembly suggestion performance.

In addition, it is possible to execute the assembly suggestion presentation in a state in which it is not known which of the plurality of operation sections will be effective as an operation target, and at least two of the plurality of operation sections are unique parts. and common parts common to each, it is preferable to display the common parts before the unique parts in the assembly suggestion presentation. By doing so, it is not possible to predict which operation unit will be effective just by displaying the common component, so the interest of the player can be maintained.

Further, such an assembly suggestion effect may be executed separately from the parts assembly effect described in the above embodiment, or may be executed as an assembly suggestion effect that also serves as a parts assembly effect. may also serve as an assembly suggestion effect.

(Modification 3)
In the above-described embodiment, in the handle assembling effect, the form in which the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball-hitting operation handle 30 are displayed in an assembling manner was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shooting Before performing the notification of hitting to the right in the operation prompting effect A, the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball hitting operation handle 30 may be displayed in a non-assembled manner. Modification 3 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-27. 8-27, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the steering wheel assembly effect in Modified Example 3 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the handle assembly effect, the part images ZB1 to ZB4 that make up the ball-hitting operation handle 30 are displayed in a manner in which the door frame image Z16 is assembled. , the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged manner, and as shown in FIG. As shown in 8-27(F), it is also possible to notify of hitting to the right.

The manner in which the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially displayed can be variously changed. , display in a manner that appears from the periphery of the display area and gathers in the center, or display in a manner that gradually changes from a difficult to identify manner to a identifiable manner (fade-in display) is also possible.

(Modification 4)
In the above-described embodiment, in the path assembly presentation, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 that make up the second path K2 are displayed in a manner that they are assembled to the game board image Z20, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it is also possible to display the part images ZD1 to ZD4 that make up the second path K2 in a non-assembled manner before the right shot notification in the shooting operation promotion effect B is performed. Modification 4 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-28. 8-28, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the route construction effect in Modified Example 4 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the path assembling effect, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 that make up the second path K2 are displayed in a mode in which they are assembled to the game board image Z20. 8-28(F), after the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged display mode, the player may be informed of hitting to the right as shown in FIG. 8-28(F). Also, when displaying in an enlarged manner, an effect image Z35 for highlighting the component images may be displayed around the component images ZD1 to ZD4.

The order in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are enlarged may be the order in which the game ball passes when hit to the right. The player can be made to recognize the flow of the game ball flowing down the second path K2 without performing the flowing effect described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the firing operation promotion effect A in which the handle assembly effect is executed at the start of the big win is executed, and the firing operation promotion effect in which the path assembly effect is executed at the end of the big win (at the start of the time saving state) Although the form in which the performance B is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, the shooting operation promoting performance B is executed at the start of the big win, and the shot is fired at the end of the big win (at the start of the time saving state). An operation prompting effect A may be executed. Also, either the shooting operation promoting effect A or the shooting operation promoting effect B may be executed at both the start and end of the big win.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after executing the route assembly effect in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if at least the route construction effect is executed, the downstream effect may be omitted. Further, when the shooting operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the big win, in the flowing effect, as shown in FIG. , the image of the game ball finally winning the special variable winning ball device 7 may be displayed. Furthermore, after executing the handle assembly effect in FIGS.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the path assembly effect shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E) of the firing operation promotion effect B, each component image ZD1 to ZD4 is displayed in a mode in which it is assembled to the game board image Z20. After that, the game board image Z20 (completed image) finally assembled with all the component images ZD1 to ZD4 is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final A game board image Z20 (completed image) in which all the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled may be displayed. That is, in the steering wheel assembly effect, an unfinished image may be displayed instead of displaying the completed image ZB5 in which all the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally assembled. As described above, in each assembly rendering, the completed image of the predetermined member does not necessarily have to be displayed as long as the third component image using at least two component images is displayed.

(Modification 5)
In the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, and the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect, the component images constituting the operation unit as the detection means for detecting the player's motion are assembled. Although the embodiment has been exemplified as a display mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When executing the movable body effect to move toward the movable body 32 (predetermined member), it may be possible to execute the movable body assembly effect to display the image of the parts constituting the movable body 32 (predetermined member) in a specific mode (for example, an assembly mode). .

Modification 5 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. 8-29, (A) is a diagram showing the operation mode of the movable body, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body. 8-30 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as the fifth modification. 8-31 (D) to (G) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as the fifth modification.

As shown in FIG. 8-29(A), the movable body 32 is positioned between the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and the effect position positioned substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the movable body 32 is assembled to a base member 501 and a front side of the base member 501, and an LED having a plurality of LEDs (light emitting diodes) arranged on the front side. It is mainly composed of a substrate 502, a base frame 503, and lens members 504A to 504C capable of transmitting light from the LEDs. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the base member 501 will be referred to as component E1, the LED substrate 502 as component E2, the base frame 503 as component E3, and the lens members 504A to 504C as component E4.

In this modification 5, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button as shown in FIGS. 31B is executed, and the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B whose operation is validated. , that is, when an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected, or when an operation effective period has passed without input of a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. When the display result is a big hit, the result of the battle performance is notified, and the movable body performance of dropping the movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position is executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts the movable body assembly effect together when executing the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), the part image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movable part image ZA1 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A part image ZE1 (part images ZE2 to ZE4) corresponding to the body assembly effect is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are progressed together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. In addition, the built-in LED may be caused to emit light according to the vertical movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30(C), the effect control CPU 120 completes the assembly of the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect before completing the assembly of the movable body 32 in the movable body assembly effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), the controller image Z1 is displayed to notify that the stick controller 31A is to be operated, while the assembly of the movable body 32 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), at the timing when the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A is input during the operation effective period, or at the timing when the operation effective period has passed without inputting the detection signal, the variable When the display result is a big hit, the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z40 is displayed around the movable body 32 in the display area of the image display device 5 so that the friend character becomes the enemy character. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, the movable body 32 is not dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character. to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

It should be noted that the assembly of the movable body 32 may not be completed in the movable body assembly presentation, regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Also, the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect may complete or fail in assembly at the same timing, or the controller assembly effect may complete or fail in assembly earlier than the movable body assembly effect.

In the fifth modification, the effect control CPU 120 exemplified a form in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are executed at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect may be executable separately from the controller assembly effect (operation promotion effect). Furthermore, in Modified Example 5, the form in which the operable movable body 32 is applied as an example of the predetermined member is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined member may be an inoperable decorative member or the like. Other members may be used, and game members and structures related to games such as winning opening forming members and passage forming members such as the special variable winning ball device 7 and the variable winning ball device 6B may also be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the firing operation promotion effect A is executed at the start of the big win game state, and the firing operation promotion effect B is executed at the end of the big win game state (at the start of the time saving state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, the shooting operation promotion performance B is executed at the start of the big win game state, and the shooting operation promotion performance A is executed at the end of the big win game state (at the start of the time saving state). You may Further, either the shooting operation promoting effect A or the shooting operation promoting effect B may be executed at the start and end of the big win game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modifications, in the controller assembly presentation in the operation promotion presentation, the handle assembly presentation and path assembly presentation in the firing operation promotion presentation, and the movable body assembly presentation, the parts images constituting the predetermined members are assembled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the component images constituting the predetermined component are displayed in a specific mode, as described above, the first component can be displayed in the second In addition to being displayed in a manner in which the wiring is assembled to the part, it may be displayed in a manner in which the wiring is connected to a connector so that it is possible to identify that the signal is flowing through the wiring after the wiring is connected.

In other words, the mode of assembling parts includes not only the assembling of parts but also the mode of connecting parts (wiring), coloring, processing, or molding the parts. Further, as in Modifications 3 and 4, each part image is displayed in a sequentially enlarged (or reduced) mode, each part image is displayed in a sequentially emphasized mode, or a mode in which each part image is arranged on a predetermined member. It is possible to display in various modes other than the above-described assembly mode, such as displaying by . In other words, the parts include all components that make up the predetermined member, such as electronic parts such as solenoids, motors, sensors, and LEDs, wiring, screws, and the like.

Further, the component image is not limited to an image simulating a component constituting a predetermined member (such as an image displayed in a manner in which a player can identify a component), and is not limited to an image related to a component constituting a predetermined member. If it is an image that does, for example, it is possible to specify the parts with a minimum of elements such as outlines, but by omitting, whitening, blurring, transforming, deforming, etc. It also includes images, etc., in which parts are displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for a person to identify them.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly presentation in the operation promotion presentation, the handle assembly presentation and path assembly presentation in the firing operation promotion presentation, and the movable body assembly presentation, the appearance of electronic parts such as wiring, connectors, sensors, and solenoids is poor. Although a form in which parts are not displayed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and these electronic parts or parts that look unattractive may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, each part image corresponding to each part is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint position. While displaying in a form (perspective view) and assembling by moving each component image straight at a predetermined speed toward a predetermined component image, the present invention is not limited to this. The component images may be displayed in forms viewed from different viewpoint positions (for example, front view, side view, rear view, plan view, bottom view, etc.). In addition, the component image may be displayed in rotation, may be moved while being displayed in a reduced/enlarged manner, or may be moved in a non-linear manner. Also, the moving speed can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, each part image corresponding to each part is assembled one by one. , the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a manner in which a plurality of parts are assembled together.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect, and in the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the firing operation promoting effect, a plurality of parts constituting the operation unit capable of detecting the player's motion are assembled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to stick controller 31A, push button 31B, ball hitting operation handle 30 and movable body 32, speakers 8L and 8R, various decorative parts, image display device 5, various winning hole forming members, variable winning ball device, game area Y , the game board 2, and the pachinko game machine 1 (including the glass door frame and the game machine frame 3)} may be displayed in a specific manner.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect is started at a predetermined timing before the timing when the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed, and the handle assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect is started. Although the path assembly effect is exemplified as being started at a predetermined timing before the timing at which the steering wheel image Z17 is displayed, for example, the controller assembly effect may be started during the battle effect, and the steering wheel assembly effect may be started during the battle effect. The effect and route assembly effect may be started at the start timing of the fanfare period or the ending period. That is, the start timing is arbitrary.

In the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect, the steering wheel assembly effect, and the route assembly effect have been exemplified by displaying a mode in which all the component images are continuously assembled within a predetermined period, but the present invention is similar to this. For example, the display of a mode in which one component image is combined with another component image (for example, cut-in display, etc.) may be divided into multiple times and performed stepwise. For example, the controller assembly effect (specific effect) may be displayed step by step by dividing the display of the mode of assembling one part image to another part image from the start of the variable display. Furthermore, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the reserved memory can be executed, one component image is combined with another component image in multiple variable displays before the variable display that executes the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. The display of the attachment mode may be performed step by step, and the completion of assembly may be displayed in the variable display for executing the operation prompting effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the mode of assembling the part images during execution of the controller assembling effect, the steering wheel assembling effect, and the route assembling effect, the background image of the part image, the effect image, etc. are displayed, It is possible to output an effect sound or the like, and the degree of expectation for a big hit may be made different by changing the display mode of the background image or the effect image or the mode of the effect sound.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembling effect, the steering wheel assembling effect, and the path assembling effect, an example of displaying the assembling mode by moving and displaying each part image (moving image display) has been exemplified. is not limited to this, and may be displayed in such a manner that each part image is assembled by a ally character or an enemy character appearing in a super ready-to-win effect, for example. In this case, the type of character (for example, whether the character to be assembled is a friendly character or an enemy character), the mode of the character (for example, the color of the character's clothes, facial expression, body shape, possession, etc.). The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different depending on items such as items that are available.

In addition, in the controller assembly rendering in the above embodiment, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 were displayed one by one in order to be assembled. From the state in which all of to ZA5 are displayed, they may be displayed in such a manner that they are assembled one by one or in plurals.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, each part image related to a plurality of parts including the first part and the second part constituting the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect and the ball hitting operation handle 30 in the handle assembly effect is assembled. is displayed, and then completed images ZA6 and ZB5 in which the assembly is completed are displayed as specific component images using at least a part of the first component image and the second component image. The specific part image using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image is not necessarily limited to the completed image in which the assembly is completed by assembling all the part images. Alternatively, an unfinished image ZA7 or an image using at least a part of the game board image Z20 and the component image ZD1 in the path assembly effect (for example, an image in which the component image ZD1 is combined with the game board image Z20. FIG. 8-23 (B)), it may be an incomplete image in which the first component image and the second component image corresponding to at least two of the plurality of components are combined.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A as shown in FIG. 8-17(F) in the controller assembly effect, and then 2 shows an example in which the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. After displaying the complete image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A, may be displayed in the form of being attached to the gaming machine frame 3, and then the controller image Z1 may be displayed. Further, the completed image ZA6 and the controller image Z1 may or may not be the same image.

(Fifth Invention)
As described above, the characteristic portion 063SG includes the following fifth invention. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, for example, the motion of a player is detected. Equipped with a push button and an operation lever as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect prompting the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the effective period of operation of the push button or the operation lever. was able to execute In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, when one of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect image corresponding to the activated detection means is displayed, and the effect is monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that interest cannot be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Before the promotion effect is executed, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes in stages (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect. 8-14 to 8-14, in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. Figure 8-16) and
with
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5 and a character image Z2 of "Close!" or, as shown in FIG.
When the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode (for example, a group success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect at a higher rate than when the parts collecting effect of failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. (See Figure 8-10)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode and the expectation for the promotion effect to be executed in the second mode can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved. do.
Specifically, when the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective, not only is the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 displayed and the operation promotion effect is started, but also the operation promotion effect is started. Execution of the part assembly performance before the operation prompting performance can suggest to the player the possibility of displaying the controller image Z1 with a high possibility of winning a big win in the operation promoting performance. It is possible to preferably increase the player's expectation for the display of the controller image Z1.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The specific effect executing means is configured to generate effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to It is characterized by being able to display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is an effect executed in relation to the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific effect executing means can display a plurality of specific effect images in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed (for example, Each part image ZA1-ZA5, ZC1-ZC5 is a black silhouette different in external shape and surface from the parts A1-A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1-C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. (See Fig. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion effect of the second aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The specific effect executing means displays a specific effect image at a higher rate when the advantageous state is obtained than when the advantageous state is not obtained, while a plurality of specific effect images are being displayed step by step in the specific effect. Change the mode (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modified example of FIG. 8-33 7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the change in the display mode of the specific effect images while the number of the specific effect images displayed increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The specific effect executing means displays the specific effect image in a manner in which it is difficult to identify which of the first mode of the promotion effect and the second mode of the promotion effect is to be executed in the specific effect. Displaying in a manner in which it is possible to identify which of the promotion effect of the first mode and the promotion effect of the second mode is to be executed (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the parts image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner that allows the player to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not known until the middle of the specific performance which of the promotion performance of the first mode and the promotion performance of the second mode will be executed, there is a sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion performance of the second mode. can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in the first mode when the specific effect image does not change to the specific display mode in the specific effect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect) When the push button 31B is determined, the ratio of production patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 failing to gather is higher than production patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 succeeding in gathering. 8-, when the part assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to be assembled is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 will be displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the promotion effect not being executed.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the characteristic portion 063SG includes the following sixth invention. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, for example, the motion of a player is detected. Equipped with a push button and an operation lever as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect prompting the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the effective period of operation of the push button or the operation lever. was able to execute In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, when one of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect image corresponding to the activated detection means is displayed, and the effect is monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that interest cannot be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Before the promotion effect is executed, a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect that displays the specific effect image in stages (for example, before the effect control CPU 120 starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect) 8-14 to 8-, a portion where part assembly effects can be executed in which part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. 16) and
with
The promotion performance executing means executes the promotion performance in a plurality of types of modes including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion performance of the first mode is executed. It is possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5 and the characters "Close!" 8-19(B), or a portion that displays a push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and a character image Z4 reading "Press!" on the image display device 5),
The specific effect executing means specifies which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed after the specific effect image is displayed in stages. Effect can be executed (for example, in the first stage to the third stage in the part assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are in the silhouette mode, that is, the player uses either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). In the fourth stage, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, when the player uses the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is displayed in an identifiable manner that allows identification of which part image it is (see Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not known until the middle of the specific performance which of the promotion performance of the first mode and the promotion performance of the second mode will be executed, there is a sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion performance of the second mode. can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The specific effect executing means is configured to generate effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to It is characterized by being able to display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is an effect executed in relation to the promotion effect.
More specifically, the effect images related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are part images ZA1 to ZA5 or part images ZC1 to ZC5 that form part of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3. are displayed in order, the player's sense of anticipation for gathering all the part images can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific effect execution means is capable of displaying a plurality of specific effect images in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed (for example, each The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are black silhouettes different in external shape and surface mode from the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. ?” is displayed in a common silhouette form in which white characters are displayed (see Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion effect of the second aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The promotion effect execution means is configured to perform a specific promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) executed in accordance with the specific effect, and a predetermined promotion effect (for example, executed in relation to a dialog announcement) regardless of the specific effect. operation promotion effects, etc.) and can be executed,
In the predetermined promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a manner different from the specific promotion effect (for example, the controller image Z1 of the operation promotion effect executed in relation to the dialogue notice is executed in relation to the parts assembly effect). 8-32.Modification 6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent confusion between the specific promotion effect and the predetermined promotion effect due to the difference in mode while preventing the decrease in interest caused by not executing the predetermined promotion effect during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The specific effect executing means displays the specific effect image based on one of a plurality of display patterns in which the rate of the advantageous state is different (for example, effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3 , PT2-1, PT2-2, and PT2-3, the execution ratio is set so that the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot increases in the order (see FIG. 8-10 (A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the types of effects can be diversified, and the player can expect whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved depending on the type of the display pattern, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the display pattern.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first mode or the second mode using a special effect image different from the specific effect image (for example, an operation promotion effect used for the operation promotion effect). A part that may be able to execute a specific effect using a special effect image that is not related to the image (for example, a character image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the appearance of the special effect image can give unexpectedness.

(Modification 6)
Next, Modification 6 of the characteristic portion 063SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-32. FIGS. 8-32 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as a modification 6 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, after executing the component gathering effect in Super Reach, as shown in FIGS. The controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed when executing the operation prompting effect for promoting the operation. 8-19A and 8-19(V), the controller in a mode different from the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. It is preferable to display an image Z63, a push button image (not shown), or the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32(A), when the movement of the player is detected while the parts gathering effect is being executed in the super ready-to-win effect, the ally character wins the battle effect and wins the jackpot. If it is possible to execute a dialogue announcement as a notification effect in which a dialogue suggesting the possibility is displayed, as shown in FIG. 31B), a controller image Z63 (or a push button image) can be displayed. Then, when an operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) is detected during the operation valid period, a character image Z61 and a dialogue image Z62 are displayed.

This controller image ZA1 has a display mode in which an effect image Z60 simulating a flame is not displayed around the stick controller 31A, like the controller image Z1 in the assembly effect. In this way, the controller image ZA1 for the operation-promoting effect to be executed in relation to the dialogue notice is different in display mode from the controller image Z1 for the operation-promoting effect to be executed in relation to the part-collecting effect, so that the parts-collecting effect is displayed. It is possible to execute other promotion effects during the production, and it becomes easy to understand that the advance notice effects are different from the operation promotion effects executed in relation to the parts assembly production, so that the player can easily understand that the parts production production is different from the operation promotion production. It becomes easy to understand which of the effects is the operation promoting effect executed in relation to.

(Modification 7)
Next, Modification 7 of the characteristic portion 063SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-33. FIGS. 8-33 (A) to (E) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of a part assembly presentation as a modification example 7 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, one of the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B is used for the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 of the part group effect. Although they are displayed in order, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the type of image displayed in the middle may be switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. .

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to (C), up to the second part images ZC1 and ZC2 corresponding to the push button 31B were displayed, but when displaying the third and subsequent part images, , the component images ZA3 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be displayed in the third and subsequent stages. In other words, in this case, the production pattern PT1-1 to PT1-3 corresponding to the push button 31B is changed to the production pattern PT2-1 to PT2-3 corresponding to the stick controller 31A, thereby increasing the reliability of the big hit. It is

(Modification 8)
Next, Modification 8 of the characteristic portion 063SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-34. 8-34, (A) to (B) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of an operation prompting presentation as Modified Example 8 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-19(A) or FIG. 8-19(B), in the operation prompting effect, a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A or a push button image imitating the push button 31B is displayed. When the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected while Z3 is being displayed, if the result of the variable display is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) and (F) For example, when the controller image Z1 of the stick controller 31A is displayed, the notification of the failure is notified when the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected. As shown in 8-34(B), an effect image in which the stick controller 31A is disassembled (destroyed) may be displayed.

By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the result of the variable display is a failure due to the operation of the stick controller 31A. In addition, especially when the controller image Z1 is displayed after completion of the assembly in the controller assembly effect, the player can be notified that the assembly has failed, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected value of the game media that can be obtained. There are multiple types of specific game states (jackpots with different numbers of rounds, etc.), high-base states (time-saving states) that make it easier to fulfill the conditions for paying out prize balls than normal game states, and the probability of being in the specific game state. High probability game state (high probability state), high probability low base state (latency probability variable state), special reach state (for example, super reach etc.), state that the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on the big hit variation pattern etc. be

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A, the push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, the hitting operation handle 30 including the handle sensor, etc. are applied as detection means capable of detecting the action of the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also included are video cameras, sensors, etc. that can be detected by digitally recording predetermined actions of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A as the detection means, the push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, and the hitting operation handle 30 including the handle sensor are detectable motions (for example, pulling forward). A controller image Z1 simulating the stick controller 31A and a push button image simulating the push button 31B in the operation promotion performance and the shooting operation promotion performance as promotion performances for prompting the player to perform an action, pushing operation, rotation operation, etc.). Z3, a handle image Z17 imitating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, a right arrow image Z18, etc. are displayed, and character images such as "Pull!", "Push!", and "Right hit!" The present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to prompting operations by displaying effect images as described above, light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided on the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, ball hitting operation handle 30, etc. ) to prompt an operation (action), output voice messages indicating operation modes such as “Pull!”, “Press!”, and “Right-handed!” An operation (action) may be prompted by a display device other than 5, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation prompting effect, the operation of either one of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, that is, the two operation units (detection means) is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and may encourage the operation of both the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Further, it may be provided with three or more operation units (detection means), and prompt the operation of at least one operation unit (detection means) among the three or more operation units (detection means).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are applied as detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect are only two or more detection means that have different operation (operation) modes of the player, such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, two or more detection means (for example, two or more buttons, etc.) provided individually even if the player's action mode is the same, or a first operation reception mode and a second operation reception mode that is different from the first operation reception mode. The operation target may also be a detection means that can change its reception mode (for example, a button whose operation reception mode can be changed between a normal operation reception mode and a projecting reception mode that protrudes from normal).

In other words, the effect control CPU 120 performs a plurality of types of promotion effects including a first mode and a second mode in which the ratio (reliability) of a big hit is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. may be executable, and in this case, at least two of the three or more modes (for example, the promotion performance by the normal operation acceptance mode and the promotion performance by the protruding acceptance mode) may be executed. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a specific effect executed before the promotion effect is executed, an operation promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to perform an action that can be detected by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the component set effect is executed before the ball is hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and the handle image Z17 indicating that the hitting operation handle 30 is rotated to the right or the right By displaying the arrow image Z18, it may be possible to execute a specific effect corresponding to a right-hand hitting operation promotion effect or the like in which a right-hand hitting notification is performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is displayed in the specific display area Z51 as a specific effect image related to the operation promotion effect that is displayed so that the display mode changes step by step in the part assembly effect, and is displayed in the operation promotion effect. Although the form in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 constituting the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific effect image is used as an operation promoting effect. As long as it is a related effect image, it may not be a part image that constitutes at least a part of the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect. An effect image having the same display mode as Z1 or push button image Z3), a effect image having a similar display mode, or an effect image having a different display mode may be used.

In other words, the specific effect image that is displayed step by step in the specific effect is an image (such as a part image), not only related effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5, etc.) related to the operation promoting effect image, but also separate effect images not related to the operation promoting effect, that is, used for the operation promoting effect It may be a special effect image (for example, a character image) unrelated to the operation promotion effect image.

Further, since the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as the specific effect images are component images that constitute a part of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B that are to be operated in the operation promotion effect, the stick controller 31A and Although the effect image is used to make it easy to identify the push button 31B, even if the image constitutes a part of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, it is difficult to identify it as a component image (for example, a fragment image). image). Further, the specific effect image may be a silhouette image, an icon image, or a photograph image of the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect as the specific effect, a form in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step (in order) and arranged in the specific display area Z51 was exemplified. , The present invention is not limited to this. When the specific effect can be executed, after the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed side by side in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect as in the above-described embodiment, the displayed component image ZA1 is displayed. A partial image constituting a part of the push button image Z3 and the steering wheel image Z17 is assembled so as to assemble the push button image Z3 and the steering wheel image Z17 before the promotion rendering is executed so as to execute the controller assembly rendering for assembling ZA5. Alternatively, the right arrow image Z18 may be formed by collecting partial images forming part of the right arrow image Z18.

That is, in the specific effect, the specific effect image is displayed step by step, followed by the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the push button image Z3 is displayed). If it is possible to specify (the player can predict) which of the operation promotion effects to be executed), as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific effect images displayed in stages are used to finally A plurality of specific effect images may be displayed in order without displaying the operation promoting effect image at the time, or the display mode of one specific effect image may be changed step by step so that the operation promoting effect image can be specified. (For example, the display mode of the controller image Z1 may be changed step by step like the component images ZA1 to ZA5).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect as the specific effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the fourth stage, and the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed and the push button image Z3 are displayed. Although the form in which it is possible to specify which of the operation prompting effects to be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and finally the first mode of the promoting effect (controller image If it becomes possible to specify which one of the second mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is to be executed, it will not necessarily be possible to specify the specific effect image (each The component images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5) may not be displayed in a manner that allows identification of which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed. That is, after changing each of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 to the third stage, an effect image ( For example, a character image such as "Get the controller!") is displayed separately from the specific effect image, or a voice that can specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed. (For example, "CONTROLLER GET!") may be output.

Further, the stepwise change in the display mode of the specific effect image in the specific effect means that the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A change from the silhouette mode to the icon mode in the part assembly effect, Not only does the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increase sequentially, that is, the specific effect images are displayed step by step, the display mode of the specific display area Z51 changes, For example, with the passage of time, the display mode such as the color, shape, contrast, and brightness of the specific effect image may change, or the characters, symbols, numbers, etc. may be updated or additionally displayed, the level, etc. Including those in which an increase or decrease is displayed, and those in which the specific effect image changes from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see.

In addition, displaying the specific effect image in stages in the specific effect means that in the part collective effect, the display mode of one or more of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage. In addition to displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 is increased or decreased by sequentially displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 by a predetermined number. and display such that a predetermined operation prompting effect image is constructed using the component images ZA1 to ZA5, like the controller assembly effect.

Further, the specific effect image may be, for example, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 themselves, or may be an image including the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and their surrounding background areas. Further, the stepwise change may be part or all of the display mode of the specific effect image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a specific display mode of a specific effect image in the part assembly effect (specific effect), all of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51. Although the form in which the display mode of gathering success is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display mode can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is a predetermined display mode. Even if all of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 do not gather in the display area Z51, a predetermined specific effect image (for example, the component image ZA5 or the component image ZC5) may be displayed. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly presentation, the form in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step in the specific display area Z51 was exemplified. Two or more images out of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed together, or all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 may be displayed together like the assembly suggestive rendering of the second modification. , ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the first stage display manner, then the display manners of some or all of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be changed in stages.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the form in which either the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step in the specific display area Z51 was exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed in a mixed state. Execution of the operation prompting effect by the corresponding operation unit may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of each part image changes in four stages (see FIGS. 8 to 11) in the part assembly effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be changed in at least two stages, and may be changed in five or more stages.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of each part image changes from the first stage to the fourth stage in the part assembly presentation. Any one or more of the component images may have an effect pattern in which display is started from the second stage or higher.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the display mode of each part image is exemplified as a form in which the display mode changes from the first stage to the fourth stage at a predetermined timing during the ready-to-win effect. is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed at the timing when the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly presentation, each component image is selected from the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3 in the first to third stages. is displayed in a difficult-to-identify (difficult-to-identify) manner, and in the fourth stage, it is displayed in an identifiable (identifiable) manner to indicate which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least in the first stage, the promotion effect of the first mode (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second mode (push If it is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to identify (difficult to identify) which one is to be executed, it can be identified in the second and third stages. It may be displayed in a (identifiable) mode. Also, the number of steps for displaying in a difficult-to-identify manner and the number of steps for displaying in an identifiable manner should be at least one each, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first stage and the second stage of the part assembly production, the form using the silhouette mode commonly used for the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in the first and second stages and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 in the first and second stages are displayed in different display modes. You may make it For example, in the first step or the second step, one of a plurality of silhouette images having different display modes may be displayed.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as the specific effect images are the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the push button image Z3 is displayed). The aspect in which it is difficult to identify which one is to be executed is, for example, the shape of the part image is deformed as in the silhouette aspect, the surface aspect is not shown, Partially omitted, outlined, blurred, deformed, etc., or in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to see the specific effect image (for example, a manner that makes it difficult to see by increasing or decreasing the brightness). This includes images that display effect images in a manner that makes it difficult to identify them.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when it is decided to display the controller image Z1 simulating the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion effect, the controller image Z1 is displayed before the controller image Z1 is displayed at the start of the operation effective period of the stick controller 31A. , the present invention is not limited to this. , the controller assembly effect may not be executed. In addition, even when all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed in the part assembly effect (when the assembly is successful), the operation effective period of the stick controller 31A is started without executing the controller assembly effect. The controller image Z1 may be displayed along with .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even when an effect based on the assembly failure effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 is executed in the part assembly effect, the controller image Z1 may be displayed in the operation promotion effect. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect based on the production failure pattern PT1-1, PT2-1 of gathering failure is executed, the controller image Z1 is displayed in an operation promotion effect. You may choose not to do so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly presentation, even when the presentation based on the assembly success presentation pattern PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, 2-3 is executed, the push button is pressed in the operation promotion presentation. Although the form in which the image Z3 is displayed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects based on the production patterns PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, PT2-2, PT2-3 of successful assembly are shown. is executed, the push button image Z3 may not be displayed in the operation prompting effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which the controller assembly effect can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button assembly effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when determining the effect pattern type in the part set effect pattern determination process, the execution ratio is set to be different between the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B as the operation object in the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the performance patterns may be determined at a different rate depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. However, one of the performance patterns may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the controller assembly performance is executed in the operation prompting performance.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the part assembly effect as the specific effect is executed during the battle effect period in Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion notification is started. The execution period of the parts set effect is arbitrary as long as it is before the event, for example, other than the execution period of the super reach battle effect (for example, the period from the start of the variable display to the time before it develops into super reach, etc.) good too. Specifically, by temporarily stopping the decorative patterns during the variable display of the decorative patterns and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays. In the case of executing the operation prompting effect according to the time, the specific effect may be executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern. Alternatively, it may be the execution period of the variable display before the variable display in which the part assembly effect is executed as the pre-reading preview effect. Furthermore, the parts assembly effect may be executed multiple times during the execution period of one variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect as the specific effect, the time period (demonstration period) for displaying the part images in stages is the same. The presentation period may be different according to 1 to 3.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect and the specific effect (parts gathering effect) corresponding to the operation promotion effect are illustrated as being executed only when the variable display based on the super reach fluctuation pattern is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The presentation time may be varied according to the variable display time of the pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in sequence in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly presentation, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a pre-reading preview effect, it is possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal, and the display mode of the suspended display or active display can be changed. , the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, which are the specific effect images, are changed to a identifiable display mode at the timing before the parts assembly effect is started, and the parts assembly effect is started at the timing when the parts assembly effect is started. It may be possible to execute an effect such that the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed as display or active display are moved to the specific display area Z51 and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that the part set effect will be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. One game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the case of a slot machine, the game area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which symbols are displayed by a variable display device such as reels. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to the variable display device (for example, a reel, a liquid crystal display device, etc.) with the above-described patterns.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also performs variable display of identification information, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, the game machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of detecting the actions of a player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a handle sensor (not shown), such as a hitting operation handle 30), and promotion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a promotion effect to encourage the player to perform an action that can be detected by the detection means (for example, the stick 8-19 (A) (B), during which the operation of the controller 31A or the push button 31B is effective, the operation prompting effect for prompting the player to perform an action that can be detected by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. )) and, before the promotion effect is executed, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes step by step (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform Before starting the operation promoting effect, a part assembly effect can be executed for displaying step by step the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promoting effect. (see FIGS. 8-14 to 8-16), wherein the promotion effect executing means places the promotion effect as the advantageous state compared to the case where the first mode and the promotion effect of the first mode are executed. It is possible to execute the promotion effect in a plurality of modes including a second mode in which the ratio of A controller image Z1 imitating a stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 reading "Exit!" and a character image Z4 saying "Push!"), and when the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect is performed in the second mode. It is executable (for example, when the parts assembly effect of assembly success based on production patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, it is more likely than when the parts assembly production of assembly failure based on production pattern PT2-1 is executed A portion in which the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted at a high rate through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect. 8-10), furthermore, a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to a set value of 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing in FIGS. 9 to 15) that can be set to any set value among the values up to ), and after the end of the advantageous state, control to the advantageous state a special state control means (for example, a CPU 103 that controls to a variable probability state according to the jackpot type after the jackpot game state ends), and As a display result of the variable display when the special state is controlled, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result is set according to the setting value set by the setting means. (For example, CPU120 for production|presentation control which performs the process of step 048AKS010 etc.) game machines are mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation that the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode and the promotion effect is executed in the second mode. improves. In addition, the display result of the variable display during the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition to suggesting the setting value based on the display ratio of the predetermined result during the special state, the setting value may be suggested based on the ratio of the display mode of the specific effect image changing to the specific display mode in the specific effect. . For example, when changing the display mode of the specific effect image in stages, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to change to the specific display mode, and it is determined to change to the specific display mode according to the set value. By varying the ratio of the set value, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is to change to the specific display mode. By doing so, when the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode, the expectation that the promotion effect will be executed in the second mode and will be in an advantageous state, and the set Since the expectation that the set value is advantageous for the player is improved, the interest in the game can be further improved.
Further, in addition to suggesting the setting value based on the display ratio of the predetermined result during the special state, the setting value may be suggested based on the change mode when the display mode of the specific effect image changes in the specific effect. For example, when changing the display mode of the specific effect image step by step, a plurality of types of change patterns (for example, three types of change patterns of A→B→C, A→D→C, and A→E→C) are used. By selecting from among them by lottery or the like and varying the selection ratio of each change pattern according to the set value, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the more the specific type (for example, A → E→C) change pattern may be used to facilitate the change. In this way, when the display mode of the specific effect image changes step by step, the variation mode becomes abundant, and when the display mode changes in a specific type of change pattern, the set value that is set is advantageous for the player. Since the feeling of anticipation for being is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, in this way, it is possible to suggest a setting value by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements such as the display ratio of a predetermined result in a special state and the ratio of display mode of a specific effect image changing to a specific display mode). Then, when a set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested for a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the set value is advantageous to the player. Even if no advantageous set value is suggested for the player, if an advantageous set value is suggested for other elements, the player can maintain the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player. Interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can improve amusement in a game, variable display of identification information is performed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, an advantageous state (for example, a big win) is provided to the player. A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to a game state, etc., and has a plurality of stages of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., set values that are most unfavorable to the player). A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing of FIGS. 9 to 15, etc.) that can be set to any setting value from a certain value of 1 to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player. and, after the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling a special state with a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, after the jackpot game state is finished, according to the jackpot type, such as a CPU 103 that controls to a variable probability state), and as a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result that is a part of the display result different from the specific result , a gaming machine that varies according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 048AKS010). Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of Characteristic Portion 048AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 048AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIG. 9-1, a pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface, and a game board. It is composed of a game machine frame (underframe) for supporting and fixing the board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, a glass door frame having a glass window is rotatable about the left side of the game machine frame between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. can not be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories (special figure reserved memory number) of variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed on the game board 2. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 207SG002R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

The main board 11 in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment is not shown, but the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. is mounted on the back of the In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Note that the setting value change state in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 is accommodated in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 are housed in the board case 207SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the substrate case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame is closed. The operation becomes possible by opening the frame for the game machine. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

A display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the substrate case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. (The same applies to the characteristic portion 049AK and the characteristic portion 050AK below). In addition, the set value that is set is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12 as a set value designation command (the same applies to the characteristic portion 049AK and the characteristic portion 050AK below).

9-2(A) and 9-2(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If the is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, set 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, it is 1/200, when the set value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the set value is 3, it is 1/ 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 to 9-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability change for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, Figure 9-2 (A), Figure 9-3 (A), Figure 9-4 (A), Figure 9-5 (A), Figure 9-6 (A), Figure 9-7 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, Figure 9-2 (B), Figure 9-3 (B), Figure 9-4 (B), Figure 9-5 (B), Figure 9-6 (B), Figure 9-7 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 048AK of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" depending on the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (up to 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-10, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value, regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the judgment value contained in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, and regardless of the game state and setting value, hit judgment Based on the value of 32767, the variable display result is determined with the determination value contained within a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit F). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-2(A) to 9-7(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of the big win increases, and the big win C as the big win type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state or a big hit game state switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. FIG. 9-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table. In the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type in the first special figure and the second special figure, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game, and the high accuracy high base state. The jackpot types of A to jackpot F (also called probability variable jackpot) are set. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, once a big hit is achieved, 100% probability variation control is performed. In addition, either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, only time-saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit G (also called non-probability variable big hit) that shifts to the low probability high base state The jackpot type and the jackpot type of the jackpot H in which the variable probability control continues until the next jackpot (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is over.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. B" is a normal open big win in which 8 rounds (so-called 8 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player ( It is a so-called “suddenly” big hit). In addition, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot D" is a normal opening jackpot in which rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated five times (so-called five rounds), The jackpot game state by "jackpot E" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot F" is a normal open jackpot in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated ( It is a so-called “suddenly” big hit).

High-precision control and time-saving control (probability variable state) executed after the end of the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are performed a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game state (feature of the present embodiment 100 times in the part 048AK) is executed, or the game ends when a big win game state is entered before the predetermined number of special game is executed. Therefore, when the big hit occurs again, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the big-hit game state, so that the big-hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. state.

It should be noted that, for example, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of determining a so-called definite big hit, such as big win C or big win F, may be lowered in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ball payout rate is the highest, and as the set value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the ball payout rate becomes lower. Just do it. In addition, the ratio of the jackpot types determined according to the set value may be different. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate for the player. As described above, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the game interest can be improved.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. 9-13 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (207SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), proceed to 207SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). move on.

At 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the gaming machine frame is open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not there is (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

At 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when starting the pachinko game machine 1 this time (whether to execute RAM clear processing (207SGSa013e)) or not ( 207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) without executing, go to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), proceed to 207SGSa022; (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

In addition, at 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, ie, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (open the game machine frame, turn on the lock switch 207SG051, and operate the clear switch, the pachinko machine 1), the set values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes 207SGSa010 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 stops blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (207SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 1st display section 207SG029A, 2nd display section 207SG029B, 3rd display section 207SG029C, and 4th display section 207SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 207SG029, as a notification (error notification) of recovery from power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (207SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), and the display monitor 207SG029 , 1st special symbol display device 4A and 2nd special symbol display device 4B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-13, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa013d (207SGSa013d; Y), RAM clear processing (207SGSa013e) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 207SGSa021 may be executed after clearing the set value change flag.

FIG. 9-14 (A) is a flow chart showing RAM clear processing (207SGSa013e) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) where the RAM clear flag is stored. (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to 207SGSa042.If the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to , and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

In the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-14B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area. Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 onwards) include special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol and a set value read out for setting the display result determination table when determining the variable display result in normal processing (determination used set value) are stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the leading address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be executed without fail. A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set values.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK in the present embodiment, the form of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clearing process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When activated by the start, only game information stored in a predetermined address of RAM 102 (address F003 and subsequent addresses in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

In addition, in the feature part 048AK in the present embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the processing of storing and reading RAM clear flags in RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. In addition, when storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102, since the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM clear flag can be changed by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first reservation indicator. 25A, the second suspension indicator 25B starts blinking (207SGSa052). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the setting value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A to jackpot F) (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is stored in address F000 in RAM 102. is set to "1" (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value from 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as the set value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the execution of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processing of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa056; Y) executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. For example, the set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and a value larger by one than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. Then, the display monitor 207SG029 displays the set values stored in the display monitor 207SG029.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF at 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and turn off all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 25A and the second suspension indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored at address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the provisional setting value stored at address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is the same. If the set value stored at address F001 is different from the provisional set value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 is stored at address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional set values are updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set values.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 9-16 is a flow chart showing set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first reservation indicator. 25A, the second suspension indicator 25B starts blinking (207SGSa102). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpots A to F) (207SGSa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process execution to wait until the power failure detection process is performed (207SGSa105 ). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa107). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processing of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa107; Y) executes a power-off detection process (207SGSa108). This power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game arcade management computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. In addition, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value in the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the flashing of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 25A and the second suspension indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first reservation indicator 25A, the second By starting blinking of the holding indicator 25B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, a player or a store clerk of the game hall can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing the setting value or that the setting value is being changed. is being confirmed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, at the start of the setting value change processing or the setting value confirmation processing, as a mode corresponding to the setting value change processing or the setting value confirmation processing, Although a form in which only one LED is lit is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 can be any of the big hits A to F shown. As long as it does not correspond, the lighting mode does not matter.

Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, when starting the setting value change processing and the setting value confirmation processing, the same segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 are used as a mode corresponding to the setting value change processing and the setting value confirmation processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are set at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process. and may be illuminated in different manners.

As described above, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off once, the lock switch 207SG051 and the lock switch 207SG051 By turning on the clear switch, the set value change process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the display (base value display) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. When the setting switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display section 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being powered off once, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. (The clear switch is turned off) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the display base value using the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D is displayed. display) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses different numbers of displays depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display section 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 9-17(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in the process of step S101 of FIG. 5 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 048AK, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is set as "big hit" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state is determined and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes this random number determination process at the time of winning. , Determine whether or not it is determined to stop display the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern as a result of the special figure display, and determine whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. . As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 9-17 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (207SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-14(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIGS. 9-19, processing is performed to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

As shown in FIG. 9-19, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 determines the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it will be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 207SGS572, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not become a big hit (207SGS572; N), a small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical value range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined small hit determination range. (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 207SGS574 is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display will result in a loss (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 9-17 (A), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variable display will be a big hit at 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and if it is determined that it will not be a big hit (207SGS526; N), at 207SGS525 in the variable display Check whether it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "miss (207SGS527a), whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time-saving state (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Transmission setting of a symbol designation command, a fifth symbol designation command in the case of a big hit D, a sixth design designation command in the case of a big hit E, and a seventh design designation command in the case of a big hit F is executed (207SGS534 ), after that, as a table for judging a big hit variation pattern, select and set a big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big win type (207SGS535), and proceed to 207SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 207SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (207SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the eighth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

Also, if the time saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (207SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y ), select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure (207SGS530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, in this feature part 048AK, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, variation pattern determination for loss used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 A table B and a fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are prepared in advance. For the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, if the setting value 1 is 1, it is 1 to 450, if the setting value is 2, it is 1 to 430, and if the setting value is 3, it is 1 to 410, 1 to 390 when the set value is 4, 1 to 370 when the set value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the set value is 6.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1 to 500, and the set value is 1 to 480 if the set value is 2, 1 to 460 if the set value is 3, 1 to 440 if the set value is 4, 1 to 420 if the set value is 5, 1 to 420 if the set value is 6 400 are assigned to each.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, and set If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss, 701 to 997 are assigned regardless of the set value, out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the super reach variation pattern. there is

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is made after the determination. Also always becomes a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss .

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (207SGS536). In this characteristic part 048AK, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended. The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIGS. 9-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 9-18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), it moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, if the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. In this way, the processing of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at 207SGS541, and whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" determine whether As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of 207SGS546, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A The indicated pending data is shifted upward by one entry (207SGS547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), it moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS549). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-14(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 9-14(B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not there is a determination used set value stored (207SGS551). If it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is the same as the stored determined used set value (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, if it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored determination used setting value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value to the effect control board 12 In addition to setting for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. go into processing. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so that the pachinko gaming machine becomes unplayable (unplayable state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment stores the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the address currently stored in the top address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game parlor can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing and does not execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state. However, the CPU 103 performs processing such as restricting the shooting of game balls, and not performing the payout of prize balls or the variable display of special symbols even if the game balls to each winning hole win. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 048AK, a difference between the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is treated as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected by the management device of the gaming facility. Although the recognizable form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, blinking the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, " E." may be displayed to inform the player, the store clerk of the game arcade, etc. of the abnormality.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characteristic portion 048AK, if the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the set value used for determination, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and the game Although the security signal is output only once to the field management device, the present invention is not limited to this. may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-described unplayable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 048AK, when the set value used for determination and the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-playable state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko game It is not necessary to control the machine 1 to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102, for example, a game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored at the head address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the top address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored at the top address of the RAM 102, or the most unfavorable value for the player (this By setting 1) in the characterizing part 048AK of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from becoming excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined in 207SGS551 that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553 If it is determined that the stored judgment used set value is the same (207SGS553: Y), select the special figure display result judgment table according to the current game state, the start mouth buffer value and the set value (207SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 9-17A, that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 9-19 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display at 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and when it is determined not to be a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display at 207SGS557 (207SGS559).

When it is determined at 207SGS558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and (B) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" in the jackpot type determination table. (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 207SGS563, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Whether or not to control is determined before deriving a fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. For example, "1" to "6" may be set according to the jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot F".

On the other hand, when it is determined at 207SGS559 that it will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), it proceeds to 207SGS560 and sets the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 to ON state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is set), whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) A fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the prior determination result of , and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when the special symbol display result is determined to be "big hit" at 207SGS558, for example, when the big hit type at 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is determined. set to In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), the advance to the effect that the special figure display result is "small hit" Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol at 207SGS565, after updating and storing the set value specified at 207SGS553 in RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process. (207SGS567), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration specifying command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, since the set value used for determination is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 9-14 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. When starting up with the By storing the value in the area of the RAM 102 that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the used set value and the RAM 102 can be determined when executing the first variable display. The set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) stored at the head address of the pachinko machine 1 may be compared.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the form of determining the variable display result using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the comparison process (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIG. 9-18) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the game stop state (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when executing the random value determination process at the time of winning, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the used determination set value, or the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination use value as the result of the process Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set value does not match the finished set value, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing (processing within the pre-reading notice setting processing) performed in the pre-reading notice setting processing in step S161 of FIG. In the processing within the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 048AKS001). If no new start-up winning command is received (step 048AKS001; No), the pre-reading notice is not executed, so the processing within the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is a reception of a new starting winning command (step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the pending display number corresponding to the newly received starting winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002), and the new If the pending display number corresponding to the received start winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002; Yes), the process within the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the reserved display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is not "1" ("2" to "4") (step 048AKS002; No), the conditions for inhibiting execution of prefetching notice are established. (Step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading notice, and here, the prize-winning judgment result designation command included in the newly received starting prize-winning command designates "no judgment". When there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (check the contents of the command buffer at the time of starting winning, and the pending display number corresponding to the newly received command at the time of starting winning Each winning judgment result specification command of the pending display number before or when the newly received start winning command is the first start winning command, the second start winning command buffer It is a condition that is established when there is a command specifying a winning judgment result other than "non-reach" (judgment result of reach or higher) in the judgment result designation command. Note that the execution prohibition condition is also satisfied when it has already been decided to execute the look-ahead chance number in the variable display performed before the target (when the look-ahead chance number flag, which will be described later, is on). As a result, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player by preventing the execution of the look-ahead chance number for a plurality of targets. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is reach or higher. Note that executing the look-ahead chance number means executing the look-ahead forewarning effect by displaying the look-ahead chance number.

If the condition for inhibiting execution of the prefetching notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the processing within the prefetching notice setting processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the condition for prohibiting execution of the prefetching notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), whether or not to execute the prefetching chance is determined (step 048AKS004). Specifically, in step 048AKS004, it is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead chance number and the type of look-ahead chance number in the case of execution according to the determination result at the time of winning according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-21. In the characteristic part 048AK, as shown in FIG. 9-21, one of "no execution", "prefetching chance A", and "prefetching chance B" is determined by the determination ratio shown. It should be noted that the look-ahead chance eye is an effect that is executed as a look-ahead notice, and the variable display of the decoration pattern that is executed before the target (if multiple variable displays are executed, each of the multiple variable displays). As a result, it is an effect of deriving and displaying a predetermined chance number (a non-reach chance number when the variable display does not establish a reach).

In the characteristic portion 048AK, two kinds of prefetching chance numbers are prepared, one of which is "prefetching chance number A" and the other is "prefetching chance number B". “Prefetching Chance A” and “Prefetching Chance B” differ in the degree of expectation for the target to hit the jackpot, and the chance to stop is different (as shown in FIG. 9-21, “234” A predetermined chance is stopped, and in the look-ahead chance B, the predetermined chance of "345" is stopped.). It should be noted that when the chance eye is stopped, the decorative pattern may be illuminated. In this case, the "prefetching chance eye A" and the "prefetching chance eye B" are distinguished by emitting light of different colors. You may make it As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when "prefetching chance number B" is executed than when "prefetching chance number A" is executed.

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of the display result to be derived and displayed as the look-ahead chance may be changed according to the set value. For example, when forming a look-ahead chance eye with a combination of odd decorative symbols such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, only when the set value is "6", the combination of "315" (best) is a look-ahead chance It may be derived and displayed as an eye. Also, for example, when the setting is low, the rate at which a combination in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number, such as "133", "155", "377", etc., is derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance. (In addition, since the middle symbol and the right symbol are the same number for the predetermined display to be described later, in that case, either one of them is designated as the middle symbol so that the look-ahead chance eye and the predetermined display can be distinguished. If the left and middle symbols are the same number instead of the right symbol), in the case of high setting, the same number such as "135", "357", "379" etc. is used as a look-ahead chance. It is also possible to increase the percentage of so-called loose mesh combinations that do not include numbers and are derived and displayed. In other words, the set value may be suggested by the kind of look-ahead chance number that is derived and displayed (the look-ahead chance number may include a setting suggestion effect).

Returning to FIG. 9-20, after executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005). If the prefetching chance number is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the processing in the prefetching notice setting processing is terminated. If the prefetching chance number is to be executed (step 048AKS005; Yes), the prefetching chance number flag indicating that the prefetching chance number is to be executed is set to the ON state (step 048AKS006), and then the processing in the prefetching notice setting processing is terminated. . Note that the read-ahead chance flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

In addition, for example, in order for the player to be able to visually recognize which target is the target of the prefetching chance, a pending display notice effect is performed for the suspension of the target of the prefetching chance, and the target of the prefetching chance is displayed. The display mode of the pending display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when the look-ahead chance number is executed, the pending display forewarning effect may be executed at the same time. In addition, the pending display notice may be executed separately from the look-ahead chance.

FIG. 9-22 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing executed in the characterizing portion 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, so that the special figure display result is "losing". ” (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S521; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, the specified variation pattern determines whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" (step S522).

If it is determined in step S522 that it is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination includes a look-ahead chance, a predetermined display, and the like. It is determined by the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process (step 048AKS010) which display other than the above is to be derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the non-reach losing stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 9-22. In the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 9-23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead chance flag is set to ON (step 048AKS011). If the look-ahead chance flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 will determine the kind of look-ahead chance number determined at step 048AKS004 in FIG. ", and if it is the look-ahead chance B, the corresponding "345" decoration symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the processing of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variation immediately before the target variation of the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not the change immediately before the target, the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the change is immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the look-ahead chance flag is cleared to an off state so that the look-ahead chance is not derived and displayed in the target change (step 048AKS014). Reach loss stop design etc. decision processing is ended. In addition, for example, if the look-ahead chance number is executed only when the target fluctuation is greater than or equal to the reach (if the target fluctuation is a non-reach fluctuation, the look-ahead chance number is not executed), the target The look-ahead chance second flag may be cleared to the off state at the end of the fluctuation of . In this way, the look-ahead chance number is continuously displayed from when the look-ahead chance number flag is set to the ON state to the change immediately before the change of the target. In addition, a plurality of variations for displaying the look-ahead chance number are prepared in advance as patterns (for example, if the target variation is the fourth variation and the target is moved three times, the first and third look-ahead chance For example, a pattern of displaying eyes, a pattern of displaying second and third chances, etc.), it is also possible to display prefetching chances according to the pattern.

At step 048AKS011, when the look-ahead chance flag is off (step 048AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes predetermined display determination processing (step 048AKS015). In the characteristic part 048AK, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative patterns among the determined decorative patterns of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set value, thereby suggesting the setting value. Perform setting suggestion production. Concretely, as shown in FIG. 9-26, setting suggesting effects are performed by displaying fixed decorative symbols of non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios according to set values. Further, in the characteristic portion 048AK, the predetermined display is performed in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

FIG. 9-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 9-24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable probability control is in progress (step 048AKS041). Whether or not the variable probability control is in progress may be determined, for example, by reading the EXT data in the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. If the variable probability control is not in progress (step 048AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, if variable probability control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the previous flag is on (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the variation (previous variation) immediately before the variation for which the predetermined display was to be displayed or not, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. is provided.

If the previous flag is ON, that is, if the predetermined display is displayed in the previous variation (step 048AKS042; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, if the previous flag is off (step 048AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined display is displayed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect for displaying the predetermined display is executed, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-25. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination processing is terminated. In this way, in the characteristic portion 048AK, when the predetermined display was displayed in the previous variation, the predetermined display is not displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined display from being displayed continuously. On the other hand, the look-ahead chance eye, which is an effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit, is displayed continuously with a plurality of variations as described above, so whether it is an effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit or a setting that suggests a set value It is made easy for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive effect and prevented from being confused with the look-ahead chance due to the continuous display of the predetermined display. In this example, an example is shown in which it is determined whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the previous variation. , may be restricted so that the predetermined display is not displayed if it is three times. Furthermore, the number of times the predetermined display is displayed continuously may differ according to the set value. According to this, the variations of the production are increased and the amusement of the game can be improved. Hereinafter, executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the predetermined display is simply referred to as executing the predetermined display.

FIG. 9-25 is a diagram showing determination ratios for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined display. As shown in the figure, in the characterizing portion 048AK, it is determined whether or not the player is in a so-called consecutive game state, i.e., whether or not a consecutive game flag is on (whether or not a consecutive game flag, which will be described later), that is, whether or not it is the first big hit. Accordingly, the ratio of determination to execute the predetermined display is different. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the user is staying in the house for a long time. According to this, it is possible to prevent a set value from being easily guessed by execution of a predetermined display in a so-called consecutive house state, and to attract the player's attention after the end of the first big win. It should be noted that the predetermined display may be performed at a small rate, such as 2%, even during the continuous residence.

Returning to FIG. 9-23, after executing the processing of step 048AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the predetermined display, that is, whether or not there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016). If there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of predetermined display to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-26 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 9-26 is a diagram showing the determination ratios for determining the type of predetermined display to be performed. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, and the combination of decorative patterns "344" is derived and displayed for type A, and the decorative pattern "399" for type B. are derived and displayed, and for the type C, a combination of decorative symbols of "577" is derived and displayed. Then, it is suggested that the high setting is in the order of type A<type B<type C. FIG. Note that this example shows an example that suggests which setting value is, but for example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is an odd or even number, and the minimum setting of "1" is shown. As long as it is a suggestion about a set value, such as not being a value, the suggested content may be different. Further, there may be a type of predetermined display that is displayed only when the set value is set to high. The high setting may be, for example, the upper half setting values such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or the upper two setting values such as 5 and 6. Setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

Returning to FIG. 9-23, after executing the process of step 048AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines the predetermined display of the type determined in step 048AKS017 (determined combination of decorative symbols) as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the on state (step 048AKS019), and after adding 1 to the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display (step 048AKS020), the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination processing is terminated. The count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of type A to type C is displayed during the variable probability state (limited to cases where the state is not continuous). It is for counting the number of times displayed. At step 048AKS020, 1 is added to the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 9-27) to be described later, displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-28(f), and then cleared.

If it is determined that there is no predetermined display in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 9-23 (step 048AKS016; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative patterns that are predetermined display and look-ahead chance eyes (other than predetermined display etc.). The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data representing a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined left finalized symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the left confirmed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decoration symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decoration symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right finalized symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the right confirmed decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. It should be noted that, in order to prevent the combination of the decoration patterns that are the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye in advance, even if the decoration design that constitutes the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye (predetermined display, etc.) is not selected from each fixed design determination table. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative patterns is determined, if the combination of decorative patterns matches a predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be drawn again. In addition, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, when it is not in the variable probability state, the combination of the same decorative symbols as the predetermined display is displayed at a lower rate than in the case of the special state, regardless of the set value. It can be.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 clears the previous flag to the OFF state (step 048AKS022), and then ends the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process. In this way, when the pre-reading chance number is to be executed, the pre-reading chance number is given priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance eye is executed regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state or not, whereas the predetermined display is under control in the variable probability state and is executed only after the first big hit game state is completed (that is, (Not executed in Renso state). Further, while the look-ahead chance number is continuously displayed with a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is not continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention during the variable probability state, to make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a look-ahead chance or a predetermined display, and to improve interest. In addition, even when displaying the look-ahead chance number, if the probability is changed, the predetermined display may be given priority. In this case, if the final stop symbol after the predetermined display is displayed is used as the look-ahead chance, the player may be confused. May restrict eye execution. Specifically, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Further, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted from the time when the predetermined display is displayed five times to the end of three fluctuations. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the display of the look-ahead chance following the display of the predetermined display. In addition, the continuous game state is changed to the continuous game state (the continuous game flag is set to ON state) when the game is once again controlled to the jackpot game state and then becomes a big hit again during the variable probability state after the end. In addition, after entering the continuous state, it will not become a big hit again, and the probability variation control will be performed a predetermined number of times, and the game will end (the continuous state flag will be cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 9-22, when it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in step S522 (step S522; No), the final stop symbol that constitutes the reach combination is determined. step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining left/right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in RAM 122 is extracted, and predetermined left/right determined symbols stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like are extracted. By referring to the pattern determination table, etc., the pattern numbers of the determined decorative patterns stopped and displayed together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decoration pattern of Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, and referring to a predetermined medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. , among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the middle fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "losing" (step S521; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "definite" (for big hit C or big hit F Yes), or if the special figure display result is "small hit", it is determined whether it is a case other than these (step S525). When it is determined that it is a "definite hit" or a "small hit" (step S525; Yes), for example, a final stop pattern corresponding to the case of "definite hit" or the case of a "small hit", such as an opening chance eye. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, when any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it is determined to be the final stop symbol that constitutes one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Then, it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute one of the open chances.

After executing any of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the final variation in the probability variation state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, when probability variation control is performed in 100 variations after the end of the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the probability variation state and it is the 100th variation. If it is the final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs final variation effect setting processing (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 9-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 9-22. The final variation effect setting process is a process performed when the probability variation state ends without becoming a big hit. In the final variation effect setting process, a setting is made so that the frequency of the displayed predetermined display is visibly displayed to the player for each type, or a setting is made so that the player can visibly display the number of balls won during the consecutive games. will be In the final variable effect setting process shown in FIG. 9-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the continuous house flag is set to ON, that is, whether the game is in continuous house (step 048AKS051).

If it is not in the continuous house, that is, if the continuous house flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to display each value of the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display (for each type count value display setting) is performed (step 048AKS052). At step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28(f), settings are made to display the frequency of appearance of types A to C by bar graphs. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears each value of the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display to 0, and clears the flag to the OFF state if the previous flag is ON, and sets the acquired ball count value to 0. (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step 048AKS051 that the consecutive game is being played, that is, if the consecutive game flag is ON (step 048AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of balls obtained during the consecutive game. (step 048AKS054). It should be noted that the number of balls won during the consecutive game (acquired balls) is counted by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the game is not played consecutively, it is cleared by the above-mentioned step 048AKS053, and the game is cleared. If so, it is cleared at step 048AKS056 to be described later. In other words, it is sufficient that the number of balls won in the jackpot game state is continuously counted during the period from when the consecutive flag is turned on until it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 clears the continuous flag to the OFF state (step 048AKS055), and proceeds to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 9-22, when it is determined at step S525 that the game is other than "positive hit" or "minor hit" (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed pattern, which is updated by the random counter of the RAM 122 or the like, is extracted. By referring to the decision table, etc., the symbol numbers stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Decide on a decoration pattern. At this time, depending on whether the big win type is big win A, big win B, big win D, or big win E, a different decorative pattern may be determined to be a fixed decorative pattern.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or when it is determined that it is not the final variation in the probability variable state at step 048AKS031 (step 048AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets other effect execution settings (step S530). For example, at the start of the variable display or at a predetermined timing during execution, a performance in which a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect By executing a predetermined aspect including part or all of the aspect of the aspect in which a flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines, it is immediately announced (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit". ) may be executed in a one-shot notification mode. Alternatively, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big win" may be executed as the notice effect during fluctuation.

As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot", for example, a setting may be made to execute a predetermined mode of presentation for liveliness. More specifically, it suffices if a predetermined mode of effect can be executed, such as a mode in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up, or a mode in which a predetermined effect image of a mini character is displayed.

After that, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step S531). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation time performance control patterns corresponding to, for example, a variation pattern specified by a variation pattern specification command, and sets it as a use pattern. After executing the process of step S531, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, for example (step S532). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern etc. in the image display device 5 is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S532 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 9-28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a predetermined display or count value display for each type is performed. The illustrated example shows an example in which the predetermined display of type A is executed instead of the continuous residence. Moreover, it is a variable probability state, and variable probability control is performed until variation is performed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state. Fluctuation is initiated as shown in FIG. 9-28(a). It should be noted that FIG. 9-28(a) is assumed to be the 99th variation after the end of the jackpot game state. If it is determined to execute the predetermined display in the variation and the type is type A, as shown in FIG. The combination of decorative patterns that have been displayed) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (c), the 100th variation, that is, the final variation in the probability variation state is started, and as shown in FIG. A combination of decorative patterns determined by the method) is derived and displayed. This ends the definite variable state. It should be noted that when the probability variation state ends, after the final variation ends, a message display indicating that as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-28(f), the count value for each type set in the process of step 048AKS052 in FIG. mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Regardless, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values. Then, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), from 1238 according to each setting value The range up to the value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is set to a non-common numerical range from 1020 according to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

Especially in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value is plural. Compared to the case where it is provided, there is no need to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to the jackpot game state) more than once. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to perform control in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, the above-described hit determination value With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges. , Whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the variable state Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the big hit game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure The number of determination values included in the range is different (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, whereas the second special figure display result The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice). is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small winning game state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value is 6, whether it is controlled to the big hit game state When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value, and the small winning game state is controlled. When determining whether or not, the random number MR1 is from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

Moreover, the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment can store the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment stores the In addition to reading out the setting value, set the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value corresponding to the read setting value (set the display result determination table according to the set value), and enter the big hit game state It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting values. It is possible to prevent the display result from being judged.

Note that the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which a setting value is read from the RAM 102 each time variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read setting value. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read setting values. . When the display result determination table is set according to the setting values read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting is performed during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and stores the read setting value and the previous variable display result. The set value read out from the RAM 102 (determination used set value) is compared with the set value read out from the RAM 102 for determination. Since the error notification is performed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to the reading of an inappropriate setting value. Furthermore, not only can it be possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but it is also possible to make people around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can quickly deal with the abnormal setting value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used set value each time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be set based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, the effect An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-19, the CPU 103 uses a common variable display result determination module when executing the winning random number value determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is judged, part of the processing can be shared between the execution of the winning random number judgment and the execution of the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, the small hit Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the setting value read from the RAM 102 corresponding display result determination table is set), so the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state. When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the processing for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is shared. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, when 1 (setting value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, a form is illustrated in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big-hit determination value.

Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK, during control to the probability variable state, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative patterns among the fixed decorative patterns of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different rate according to the set value. do. In addition to the predetermined display, the look-ahead chance eye composed of fixed decorative symbols of non-ready combination is also displayed as a variable display result, so that the variation of performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, the pre-reading chance number may also be displayed at different ratios according to the set values. According to this, which set value is set is suggested by the result of the variable display during control to the variable probability state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the variable probability state is obtained by executing a special game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big win game state, or by entering a big win game state before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. finish. That is, when the big hit gaming state is not entered again, the variable probability state continues at least until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the game is controlled to the variable probability state and returned to the normal state without being controlled to the jackpot game state again, the display of the predetermined display can prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 048AK, different types of predetermined displays are displayed at different ratios according to the set values for the types A to C of the predetermined displays. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK, the determined decoration symbols of the non-reach combination forming the look-ahead chance eye are a combination of symbols different from the determined decoration symbols of the non-reach combination forming the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead effect and the setting suggesting effect, and prevent confusion with the advance notice effect of the degree of expectation of a big hit. Furthermore, while the look-ahead chance number can be displayed continuously over a plurality of variations, the predetermined display is restricted so as not to be displayed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused with the pre-reading notice exercise due to the continuous display of the predetermined display.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 048AK, after being controlled to the variable probability state, at the timing of being controlled to the normal state, by displaying a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, the frequency of the predetermined display is displayed in the game. be recognizable by a person. According to this, the player can confirm the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed, and can easily predict the set value. In addition, the display of the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is performed when the consecutive flag is off, that is, at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being controlled to the variable probability state once. only performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily guessed by displaying the count value during the continuous residence. On the other hand, in the case of the continuous game, instead of displaying the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display, the number of balls played during the game is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. . According to this, it is possible to display the obtained balls during the consecutive game and improve the interest in the game.

(Modified example of characteristic part 048AK)
In the characteristic portion 048AK, as shown in FIG. 9-8 to FIG. Although provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification shown in FIGS. 9-29 (A) and 9-29 (B), the game The numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the state or set value.

In addition, if the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. , and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Further, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1237), and the small hit determination value The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the gaming state is a probability variable state, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit determination The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value standard value). Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set continuously in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-30, Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is varied according to the set value. It is sufficient to vary the jackpot probability according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. is the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 9-30, 64990 for set value 1, 64974 for set value 2, 64954 for set value 3) or more. When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is further varied by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is greater than or equal to 65208 which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result is judged without executing both the judgment of whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment of whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining the result of variable display can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-30, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, Common numerical range and common numerical range of small hit judgment value, If 2 to 6 are set as setting values in pachinko machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value and non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value Common numerical value range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. It is possible to determine whether to control to Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the big win game is played by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control to either the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the processing load to determine whether to control to the big hitting game state and the determination of whether to control to the small hitting game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-29, when the game state is controlled to the variable probability state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the jackpot reference value, and the increased jackpot determination value Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit determination value increases, and the small hit game state Since it is sufficient to determine whether to control, the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Also in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-30, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, the CPU 103 reduces the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-30, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is exemplified, but the present invention is this However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In addition, in the characterizing section 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 9-31 and FIG. 9-32, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set to different numerical ranges.

In addition, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the numerical range of the small hit determination value ( The common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the non-common numerical range when the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6 (judgment included in the non-common numerical range In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the highest number of values), a numerical range that is continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in Figure 9-31, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 9-32, in any case The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the variation special figure, while the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value Although the form with different numbers is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same as.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set in the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. there is In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60000 as the standard value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is a big hit It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the set value. load can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state with 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, as with the characteristic portion 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value And in a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, it is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, the CPU 103 is the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning game state with 32767 as the small winning reference value, the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning game state of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, each set value is set. Although the form of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A common numerical range may be established. Incidentally, even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the same reference as in FIGS. The range from 1238, which is the value, to the value corresponding to each setting value may be set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be the smallest when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical value range of , the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, if the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value On the other hand, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special figure, the CPU 103 determines that the variation special figure is the second Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1 special figure and the case of the 2nd special figure, whether to control to the small winning game state by the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the big hit determination value or non-common It is determined whether or not to control to a big winning game state based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small winning determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined whether to control to a small hit game state or not. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). You may judge whether to control to a state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the variable probability control is always performed after the end of the jackpot game state, and the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished, or the next jackpot game state is started. , Although an example that continues until one of the end conditions is satisfied first is shown, for example, the variable probability control may continue until the next big hit game state is started (predetermined number of times (100 times ) It is not necessary to set the end condition of the variable probability control to the end of the special game). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probability variable jackpot type) that is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game state is prepared, and a special game is finished a predetermined number of times after the end of the non-probability variable big win game state. The associative state should just end at the timing when the time saving control controlled to ends. In such a gaming machine, it may be possible to display a predetermined display not only in the variable probability state but also during control in the time saving state.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, although the variable probability state continues until the next big hit game state is started, it may take a long time before the variable display result becomes a big hit (so-called continuous game) hooked state). Therefore, for example, when the number of winning game balls in the variable winning ball device 6B reaches a predetermined number or more, it is determined that the game ball has entered into a state of addiction during consecutive games, and a setting suggestion effect is performed according to the set value. good too. Also, a shooting sensor may be provided, and when the number of shots of game balls exceeds a predetermined number, it may be determined that the game has entered a state of addiction during a series of games, and a setting suggesting effect may be performed according to the set value. Furthermore, an out-sensor is provided at an out-hole into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning holes are taken in, and when the number of out-balls reaches a predetermined number or more, it is determined that the player has fallen into a state of addiction during a series of games. , setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the setting value. According to this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in a so-called addicted state during a long game, and to promote the shooting. It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect may be performed, for example, by outputting a sound, displaying a specific character, or performing both depending on the set value.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (e), after the message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is a variable probability state, is displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (f), the predetermined display as it is Although the count values provided according to the types of are shown as graphs for each type, this is just an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-28(e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is a variable probability state, is displayed, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (for example, display a message such as pressing the button) , button images, etc.), based on the fact that the push sensor 35B detects the action of the player with respect to the push button 31B, a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display may be displayed. good. According to this, an effect can be executed according to the taste of the player. It should be noted that when no action by the player is detected, the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display may not be displayed.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 049AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 049AK of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 049AK, as in the characteristic portion 048AK, once the jackpot hits, 100% probability variation control is performed after the jackpot game state ends. shall be That is, as with the characteristic portion 048AK, as the jackpot types, jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" shown in Fig. 9-12 are prepared. In addition, in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 049AK, either the first special figure and the second special figure, or both, after the end of the jackpot game state only time-saving control is executed to shift to the low probability high base state A jackpot type G (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) or a jackpot type of a jackpot H in which variable probability control continues until the next big win (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is over. In addition, in the characteristic part 049AK, when the game state is the normal state, the effect state internally provided for performing the lottery regarding the execution of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes. . The production mode in the characteristic part 049AK is, for example, a background image that is displayed differently depending on the production mode being controlled so that the player can visually recognize which production mode is being controlled, an output sound, a lamp, etc. It is not possible for the player to recognize which production mode is being controlled because the lighting pattern of the is different depending on the production mode being controlled, and it is a common aspect in any production mode, and the player is an unrecognizable internal state. In addition, in the characteristic portion 049AK in this embodiment, it is controlled to one of the plurality of production modes as the production state only when the game state is the normal state, and it is not controlled to any production mode in the variable probability state. ing.

FIG. 10-1(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the production mode determination process executed by the characteristic portion 049AK. The production mode determination process is a process for determining the production mode to be controlled (shifted) when the next normal state is controlled (processing for determining the production mode in the next normal state), and step S173 in FIG. It is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is reception of an effect control command that specifies to start a big hit game state in the special figure per waiting process. The effect mode means a state of effect, and three types of effect modes such as mode A, mode B, and mode C are prepared in the characteristic part 049AK. In the characteristic part 049AK, even when the common setting suggestion effect is performed, the suggested contents are different depending on which effect mode is controlled. Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which effect mode is being controlled.

When the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 10-1(A) is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current game state is the normal state (049AKS001). If it is in the normal state (step 049AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the current effect mode by checking the effect mode storage buffer shown in FIG. 10-1(B) (step 049AKS002). The effect mode storage buffer is a buffer for storing the current effect mode and the next effect mode, which are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and in the initial state, "mode A" is stored as the current effect mode. ing.

After executing the process of step 049AKS002, the production control CPU 120 determines the production mode (next production mode) in the next normal state according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. ), it is stored as the next effect mode in the effect mode storage buffer shown in FIG. 10-1(B). Specifically, if the current production mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode A", according to the set value, the next production mode according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-2 (A) to decide. Further, when the specified current production mode is "mode B", the next production mode is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-2(B) according to the set value. When the specified current production mode is "mode C", the next production mode is determined according to the determined ratio shown in FIG. 10-2(C) according to the set value.

In the characteristic portion 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A. In the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the higher the set value is even and the higher the set value (set value “4” or “6”), the more “mode A” is set. The determination ratio is set so as to make it easier to shift to "mode C". Further, in the characterizing portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10B, the determination ratio is set so that the transition from "mode B" to "mode A" is not performed. Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. The decision ratio is set so that it is easy to shift to B'.

Returning to FIG. 10-1 (A), after executing the process of step 049AKS003, or when it is determined that it is not a normal state (probability variable state) at step 049AKS001 (step 049AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 Terminate the production mode determination process. It should be noted that, in the case of the probability variable state, the production mode determination process is ended as it is because the production mode for the next normal state has already been decided at the timing when the normal state becomes a big hit (at the time of the first big hit in the continuous state). This is because it is stored in the performance mode storage buffer.

FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting suggestion rendering process executed by the characteristic portion 049AK. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process of step S177 in FIG. 7, and is a process of executing a setting suggestion effect as the ending effect. In the characteristic portion 049AK, as described above, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect is different depending on which effect mode is being controlled. The suggested contents differ depending on which production mode is controlled. When the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. 10-3 is started, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the current effect mode (step 049AKS011). For example, if the current presentation mode is "mode A" and the next presentation mode is "mode C", then in step 049AKS011, "mode A" is specified as the current presentation mode.

After executing the process of step 049AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the specified effect mode and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-4. In the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-4, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A. Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 049AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect, that is, whether or not the setting suggesting effect is to be executed (step 049AKS013). If the setting suggestion effect is not executed (step 049AKS013; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion effect process as it is.

On the other hand, if the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, that is, if there is execution (step 049AKS013; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the setting suggestion execution tables shown in FIGS. setting suggestion execution table is set according to the effect mode specified in step 049AKS011, and the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed is determined according to the set value (step 049AKS014).

FIGS. 10-5(A) to 10-5(C) are diagrams showing configuration examples of setting suggestion execution tables. As shown in the figure, in the characterizing portion 049AK, the setting suggesting effect is executed by lighting the lamp provided on the game board 2 in any one of "white", "blue" and "red". Note that the lamp includes an LED. FIG. 10-5(A) is a setting suggestion execution table that is set when the current presentation mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode A". As shown in the figure, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5(A) sets the decision ratio so as to suggest that the high setting is made when the "red" lighting is performed. FIG. 10-5(B) is a setting suggestion execution table that is set when the current presentation mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode B". As shown, in the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5(B), when "white" lighting is performed, odd setting values are set at a high rate, and "blue" lighting is performed. is set to indicate that the even set value is set to a high percentage when the light is on, and the decision percentage is set to suggest a high setting when the "red" lighting is performed. FIG. 10-5(C) is a setting suggestion execution table that is set when the current presentation mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode C". As shown in the figure, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5(C) definitely notifies that the set value is an odd number when "white" is lit, and "blue" is lit. Determination percentage is set to deterministically signal that even set point is set if flashing occurs and to suggest high setting if red flashing occurs It is That is, in the characteristic part 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A.

In this way, in the characteristic portion 049AK, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in which "blue" lighting is performed in the "mode B", and in the "mode C", the "blue" lighting is performed. When the setting suggestion effect is executed, both are common setting suggestion effects such as lighting "blue", but one suggests that the ratio of even setting values is high, The other definitely notifies that it is an even setting value. That is, when the setting suggestion effect of lighting "blue" is executed, it may or may not be determined that the set value is even. In this manner, even if the setting suggestion performance is common, the content of suggestion can be made different according to which performance mode it is in among a plurality of performance modes, and the variations related to the setting suggestion performance are increased to improve the game amusement. can be made In addition, although a common setting suggestion performance can be executed regardless of which performance mode is selected among a plurality of performance modes, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance differs according to the set performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect and improve the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 049AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect of the determined type (step 049AKS015), and ends the setting suggesting effect process. Note that the executed setting suggesting effect may end at the timing when the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0" in the ending effect process of step S177, for example.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, similarly to the characteristic portion 048AK, a predetermined number of times (100 times) of the special figure games are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, or before the predetermined number of times of the special figure games are executed. The game state is controlled to the probability variable state until any of the conditions of becoming a jackpot game state is satisfied. In the characteristic portion 049AK, at the timing when the variable probability state ends by executing the special figure game for a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the normal state is entered. It is possible to execute a mode suggesting effect for suggesting to the player which effect mode the effect mode to be shifted to when controlled is.

FIG. 10-6 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing executed in the characterizing portion 049AK. In the variable display start setting process, execution setting of the mode suggestion effect is performed. Note that the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6 is different from the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 9-22) executed in the characteristic part 048AK, since step 048AKS010 is executed in the characteristic part 048AK. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 049AK, the process of step S523 is executed. Further, while the processing of step 048AKS032 is executed in the characteristic part 048AK, the processing of step 049AKS021 is executed in the characteristic part 049AK. Other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-22, so description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern in step S522 shown in FIG. 10-6 (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of confirmed decoration symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination. is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left finalized symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the left confirmed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decoration symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decoration symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right finalized symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the right confirmed decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. In addition, in the process of step S523, it is only necessary to determine the fixed decoration symbol of the non-reach combination which is the predetermined chance eye symbol corresponding to the case where the variable symbol notice is being executed.

Then, in step 048AKS031, when it is determined that it is controlled to the probability variable state and is the final variation in the probability variable state (step 048AKS031; Yes), the execution setting of the mode suggestion performance that suggests the performance mode to be controlled during the next normal state Mode suggestion effect setting processing to be performed is executed (step 049AKS021). As a result, the mode suggestion effect is executed in the final variation in the probability variation state. By executing the mode suggesting effect in this manner, the player can predict which effect mode the game will be controlled to, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, even if the mode suggestion effect is not during the final variation in the probability variation state, for example, it is the final variation in the probability variation state in the special figure per waiting process of step S173 in FIG. You may According to this, it is possible to execute the mode suggesting effect at the timing after the final variation in the variable probability state, and it is possible to suggest the effect mode at a timing closer than returning from the variable probability state to the normal state.

FIG. 10-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the mode suggestion effect setting process executed in step 049AKS021 of FIG. 10-6. In the mode suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the next effect mode by checking the effect mode storage buffer (step 049AKS031). For example, if the current presentation mode is "mode A" and the next presentation mode is "mode C", then in step 049AKS031, "mode C" is specified as the next presentation mode.

After executing the processing of step 049AKS031, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of mode suggesting effect to be executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-8 according to the specified effect mode (step 049AKS032). As shown in FIG. 10-8, in the characteristic portion 049AK, the mode suggestion effect of "suggestion A" that suggests that the next mode (the effect mode to be shifted when being controlled to the normal state) is "mode A" , There is a mode suggestion effect of "suggestion B" that suggests that it is "mode B" and a mode suggestion effect of "suggestion C" that suggests that it is "mode C", and the type of "suggestion C" The decision ratio is set so as to definitely notify that the next mode is 'mode B' or 'mode C', that is, not 'mode A', when the mode suggesting performance is executed. Note that, as described above, in the characteristic portion 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect that is executed at the time of control increases in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the mode suggesting effect of the type of "suggestion C". Note that the mode suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 049AK may be, for example, by displaying one of the characters A to C on the image display device 5, thereby suggesting the mode A to mode C respectively as the next mode. For example, "suggestion A" displays an image, "suggestion B" lights a lamp in a predetermined color, and "suggestion C" outputs sound. may be performed.

Returning to FIG. 10-7, after executing the process of step 049AKS032, the effect control CPU 120 updates the contents of the effect mode storage buffer (step 049AKS033), and ends the mode suggestion effect setting process. In the process of step 049AKS033, the content stored as the next performance mode is updated as the current performance mode. For example, if the current production mode is "mode A" and the next production mode is "mode C", "mode C" is shifted to the current production mode. As a result, the variable probability state is terminated, and at the timing of the normal state, the effect mode of the contents stored in the current effect mode of the effect mode storage buffer is controlled. For example, in the special figure per waiting process of step S173 of FIG. It is sufficient to make settings to shift to the mode.

FIG. 10-9 is a timing chart showing transitions between the game state and the effect state. Here, a case where the current production mode is "mode A" and the next production mode is determined to be "mode C" will be described as an example. In addition, it is assumed that the game state up to the big hit 1 shown in the figure is the normal state. When the current production mode is controlled to "mode A" and a big hit is achieved (jackpot 1 in the drawing), the production mode determination process shown in FIG. 10-1(A) is executed, and as shown in FIG. Then, the production mode (next mode) for the next normal state is determined (mode C is determined in this example). Then, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot 1 and becomes the ending of jackpot 1, the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined at the indicated ratio, and if it is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the set values according to the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5(A). will be As shown in FIG. 10-9, after the jackpot game state of jackpot 1 is finished, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state. In addition, the probability variable state is obtained by executing a special game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big win game state, or by entering a big win game state before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. Although it ends, the illustrated example shows a case where the game ends when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

Subsequently, when it comes to the final variation of the probability variable state, the mode suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. A mode suggesting effect suggesting the effect mode to be played is executed, and the next mode is updated to the current mode (mode C is the current mode). As a result, the effect mode in the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed next is suggested, so that the player's attention can be attracted. In addition, when the suggestion (suggestion C) for the performance mode C is performed, the reliability of the setting suggestion performance to be executed after that is high, so the setting suggestion performance to be executed at the end timing of the jackpot game state thereafter. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to confirm the content suggested by , and to promote the operation.

It should be noted that, as described above, the effect mode controlled in the characteristic portion 049AK is unrecognizable to the player. Therefore, the player predicts the effect mode to be controlled next by executing the mode suggesting effect. As shown in Fig. 10-2(A), the higher the set value (set value "4" or "6"), the more the mode changes from "mode A" to "mode C." The decision ratio is set to facilitate the transition. Therefore, when the mode suggesting effect executed last time is a suggestion (suggestion A) corresponding to mode A, and the mode suggesting effect executed this time is a suggestion (suggestion C) corresponding to mode C, the player It can be predicted that mode A has been transferred to mode C. In this case, since the player expects the setting value to be ``4'' or ``6'', the high setting is suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed at the end timing of the jackpot game state thereafter. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to confirm, and to promote the operation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(B), since the determination ratio is set so as not to shift from "mode B" to "mode A", the executed mode suggestion effect corresponds to mode B. If it is a suggestion (suggestion B), the production mode to be shifted next is a production mode C that is a production mode with a high degree of reliability of the contents suggested by the setting suggestion production executed when controlled. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player, and the operation can be promoted until the next big win game state is reached. Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. The decision ratio is set so that it is easy to shift to B'. Therefore, when the mode suggesting effect executed last time is a suggestion (suggestion C) corresponding to mode C, and the mode suggesting effect executed this time is a suggestion (suggestion B) corresponding to mode B, It can be predicted that mode C has been transferred to mode B. In this case, since the player expects the maximum set value, the high setting is suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed at the end timing of the jackpot game state after that, and the maximum set value may be set. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to confirm that the is high, and to promote the operation.

Returning to FIG. 10-9, when the final variation of the variable probability state is completed, the game state becomes the normal state, and the effect mode (mode C) determined when the jackpot 1 is reached is controlled. Then, when the big win is made again (big win 2 shown in the figure), the production mode (next mode) in the next normal state is determined, and in the ending of the big win 2, the mode C corresponding to the current production state is shown in FIG. 4, it is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if it is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the set values according to the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5(C). is done.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 049AK of the present embodiment, as the effect state internally provided for performing the lottery related to the execution of the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to control one of a plurality of types of effect modes. is. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in which "blue" lighting is performed in "mode B", and "blue" lighting is performed in "mode C". When the setting suggestion effect is executed, both are common setting suggestion effects such as lighting "blue", but one suggests that the ratio of even setting values is high On the other hand, the other definitely notifies that the set value is an even number. Therefore, even when the common setting suggesting effect is performed, the suggesting content differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. According to this, by providing a plurality of performance modes, it is possible to increase the variations related to the setting suggestion performance and improve the game interest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 049AK of the present embodiment, although it is possible to execute a common setting suggestion effect regardless of which of the plurality of effect modes it is, , the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs according to the set effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, when the game state is controlled to the normal state, it is controlled to any one of a plurality of types of production modes, but in the variable probability state, it is not controlled to any production mode. That is, when the game state is the normal state, the number of controllable effect modes is greater than when the game state is the probability variable constant match. According to this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in a normal state, which is not in an advantageous state for the player.

Moreover, the production mode in the characteristic part 049AK is a common aspect in any production mode, and is an internal state that the player cannot recognize. Then, in the characteristic portion 049AK, it is possible to execute a mode suggesting effect for suggesting to the player which effect mode the effect mode to be shifted to when the normal state is controlled. According to this, it is possible to make the player anticipate which effect state the game will be controlled to, and to enhance the interest in the game.

Also, in the characteristic part 049AK, the mode suggestion effect is executed in the final variation in the probability variation state. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the mode suggestion effect at the timing after the final variation in the probability variation state. That is, in the characteristic part 049AK, the player is suggested to which effect state to be controlled at the timing of control from the variable probability state to the normal state. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention at the timing of returning from the variable probability state to the normal state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, a mode suggesting effect can be executed, and a setting suggesting effect corresponding to the effect mode is executed as an ending effect during the jackpot game state. According to this, the set value set by the combination of the mode suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect can be predicted, and the variations of the effect can be increased.

Further, in the characteristic part 049AK, when it is determined that there is reception of an effect control command designating to start the jackpot game state in the special figure per waiting process of step S173 in FIG. Determines the production mode to be controlled (transitioned) when According to this, it is possible to improve interest in which production mode is to be set at the timing when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(Modified example of characteristic part 049AK)
The characteristic part 049AK shows an example of determining the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed using the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 in the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. 10-3, but this is just an example. is. The setting suggestion execution table can be arbitrarily changed, and for example, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10 may be used. Specifically, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10(A) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is equal to or greater than "2" when "red" is lit. The setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10(B) is set so as to deterministically notify that the set value is 3 or more when the red light is turned on. The setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10(C) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is "4" or more when "red" is lit. In this way, when the common "red" lighting is performed, which of the set values "2" to "4" the set value is greater than or equal to is set differently depending on the effect mode being controlled. good too. According to this, when the mode suggesting effect of suggestion C is executed, it is possible to improve the feeling of expectation for the lighting of "red" in the setting suggesting effect to be executed thereafter.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK in the above embodiment, it is controlled to one of the plurality of production modes as the production state only when the game state is the normal state, and in the variable probability state, it is not controlled to any production mode. But this is just one example. There may be an effect mode controlled in the variable probability state. And the number of production modes controlled in the variable probability state should be less than the number of production modes controlled in the normal state. According to this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during control to the normal state. In addition, what is necessary is just to determine when determining the controllable production mode in a normal state also about the production mode controllable in a variable-probability state. Then, at the ending of the jackpot game state during the continuous game state, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the effect mode during the variable probability state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that there is reception of an effect control command designating to start the jackpot game state in the special figure per waiting process of step S173, the next normal state Although the example which determines the production mode which controls when controlled (shifts) was shown, this is an example. The determination timing may be, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the variable probability state. Also, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect may not be during the ending effect in the jackpot game state, and may be during fluctuation (for example, during the reach effect of super reach or before the reach state). In this case, in the variable display start setting process of step S171, execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect may be determined according to the effect mode according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-4. According to this, it is possible to heighten the player's interest in which effect state the game is controlled to. Also, the mode suggesting effect may not be the final variation in the variable probability state, for example, it may be performed in any variation during the variable probability state, or it may be performed in the ending effect in the big win game state. As for the execution timing of the setting suggesting effect, for example, it may be executed every 50 fluctuations in the normal state, or when a time or measurement period predetermined by a real-time clock or an internal timer becomes a predetermined period. It can be executed in time. In addition, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined by a different determination ratio depending on the display result in each fluctuation, or whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the display result. may Note that the setting suggesting effect may suggest that the setting value has been changed.

In addition, when only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low probability high base state, the mode suggestion performance may be executed in the variation when the time saving control ends. Also, for example, in a gaming machine in which the variable probability control continues until the next big hit gaming state starts, and the continuous game state ends when the non-variable big win type jackpot is reached and the time reduction control ends after that, As described above, it may be controlled to one of the production modes as the production mode in the variable probability state, and based on the production mode, the setting suggestion production may be executed during the fluctuation in the variable probability state. More specifically, when the number of winning game balls in the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, or when the number of shot game balls reaches a predetermined number or more, the game enters into a state of addiction. It is determined that it is done, and the setting suggestion effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in a so-called immersive state during a series of villas.

Further, in the characterizing part 049AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which "Mode A" is stored as the current production mode in the initial state in the production mode storage buffer, but this is just an example. When the power is turned on, the current presentation mode may be determined by lottery. In this case, the decision ratio of the production mode set according to the set value at the time of power-on may be different. According to this, the lottery relating to the state of presentation is diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is sufficient if the mode suggesting effect can be executed based on the effect mode in the change after the power is turned on (for example, the first change or one of ten changes).

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio of mode C is determined to be high. In the characteristic portion 049AK, since the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed during control increases in the order of mode C>mode B>mode A, according to this, the power source Since the setting suggesting effect executed in the first game at the time of introduction suggests contents with high reliability, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player who starts the game immediately after the opening of the game parlor. In addition, since the production mode is not backed up at the time of power failure, the production mode after restoration may be different from the production mode before restoration. In such a case, if the mode suggesting effect of the type of "suggestion C" is executed, it will be definitely notified that the next mode is not "mode A", but actually "mode A" will be notified. This may confuse the player, lower the reliability of the mode suggesting effect, and lower the interest in the game. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, in the mode suggesting effect when the power is turned on, instead of using the determination ratio shown in FIG. It suffices to determine the type of mode suggestion effect to be executed by

(Description of Characteristic Portion 050AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 050AK of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 050AK, as in the characteristic portion 048AK, once a big hit occurs, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state. shall be That is, as with the characteristic portion 048AK, as the jackpot types, jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" shown in Fig. 9-12 are prepared. In addition, in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 050AK, either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, and the state is shifted to the low probability high base state. A jackpot type G (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) or a jackpot type of a jackpot H in which variable probability control continues until the next big win (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is over.

In the characteristic portion 050AK, a suggestion is made regarding a set value set by a specific effect executed before being controlled to the big win game state and a special effect executed in the big win game state. Although the details will be described later, the specific effect in the characteristic portion 050AK is an effect of displaying one of a plurality of types of character images in accordance with a set value in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect. In addition, the special effect in the characteristic part 050AK is an effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state when the specific effect is executed, and the character displayed in the executed specific effect battles with the enemy character. It is a battle production that performs In addition, in the characteristic portion 050AK in this embodiment, an example of executing a special effect as an ending effect in the big hit game state is shown, but the special effect may be executed as a round game in the big win game state, for example. In addition, special effects may be performed only for a specific round such as the 5th round, or multiple rounds in the latter half of the total number of rounds, such as the 5th to 8th rounds (in the case of 8 rounds with a big hit B). You may perform a special production over.

FIG. 11A is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing executed in the characterizing portion 050AK. The variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-1 is different from the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 9-22) executed in the characteristic part 048AK, whereas the characteristic part 048AK executes step 048AKS010. , the characteristic part 050AK executes the process of step S523 (since it is the same as the characteristic part 049AK, the description is omitted). Further, while the processing of steps 048AKS031 and 048AKS032 is executed in the characteristic portion 048AK, the processing of steps S528 and 050AKS001 is executed in the characteristic portion 050AK. Other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-22, so description thereof will be omitted.

After executing any of the processes of step S524, step S527, and step S526 shown in FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a variation pattern of super reach (step S528). In the process of step S528, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern is super reach. When it is determined in step S528 that it is a variation pattern of super reach (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific effect execution setting process for executing a specific effect (step 050AKS001).

FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific effect execution setting process executed at step 050AKS001 shown in FIG. 11-1. In the specific effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-3 (step 050AKS011). In the illustrated example, a common determination ratio is used regardless of the variable display result, but different determination ratios may be used depending on the variable display result. Moreover, it is good also as a determination ratio which differs according to the kind of super reach.

Returning to FIG. 11-2, after executing the process of step 050AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the specific effect, that is, whether or not the specific effect is executed (step 050AKS012). If the specific effect is not executed (step 050AKS012; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific effect execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, if the specific effect is to be executed, that is, if there is execution (step 050AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of specific effect to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-4. Determine (step 050AKS013).

In the characteristic portion 050AK, as shown in the figure, specific effects of types "character A" to "character C" are prepared as specific effects. The specific effects of "character A" to "character C" are effects in which images of "character A" to "character C" are displayed, respectively. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the characteristic portion 050AK, when the specific effect of the type of "character C" is executed, the set value is 2 or more (that is, it is not the minimum set value of 1). The decision percentage is set to be fixed. Therefore, the execution of the specific effect of the type of character C can arouse the player's expectation of wanting to feel secure that the set value is not the minimum setting value. Note that the characterizing portion 050AK in this embodiment shows an example in which the type of specific effect to be executed is determined at different ratios according to the setting value, but regardless of which setting value is set, It may be determined by a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 050AK, the character image of each type is displayed in the second half of the super reach (predetermined time before the variable display result is displayed) in common with each type of "character A" to "character C". The display timing of the character image is predetermined. The display timing of each character image may differ according to the type of specific effect to be executed. For example, the type of character B may be displayed later than that of character A, and the type of character C may be displayed later than that of character B. By the processing of step 050AKS013 in FIG. 11-2, the type of specific effect to be executed is determined, and the execution timing (character image display timing) is also determined. The timing for executing the specific effect may be set by a timer such as 10 seconds before the variable display result is displayed. It should be noted that the setting may be such as 40 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Since the reach effect period differs depending on the type of super reach, according to this setting, depending on the type of super reach, the specific effect will be executed at an early stage during the reach effect period of super reach. , It is possible to expand the range of production and improve interest. In the characteristic part 050AK, the specific effect is executed in the latter half of the super ready-to-win effect. can be It does not have to be executed during super reach, regardless of whether or not it becomes reach, it may be executed, for example, every 50 fluctuations, or a time or measurement period predetermined by a real-time clock, internal timer, etc. may be executed at a timing when is a predetermined period.

After executing the processing of step 050AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect flag indicating that the specific effect is to be executed to the ON state (step 050AKS014), and then ends the specific effect execution setting process. The specific effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and is cleared to an OFF state by executing a special effect described later. In addition, in the characteristic part 050AK in this embodiment, even if the variable display result is "losing", the specific effect is executed, but the special effect is not executed (because it is executed in the jackpot game state). ). Therefore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the specific effect flag set to the ON state at step 050AKS014 is cleared to the OFF state by executing the special effect described later, while the variable display If the result is "losing", the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not received in the special figure per waiting process of step S173, and the waiting time for receiving the command is It should be cleared to the OFF state when it has passed. In addition, once the specific effect is executed, it may be executed for a period of time until the variable display result is derived and displayed (the determined type of character image may be continuously displayed). That is, the specific effect execution period may be a period from the latter half of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win until the variable display result is derived and displayed. It should be noted that, for example, every 50 fluctuations, when the specific effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined time or the measurement period by the real-time clock or internal timer becomes a predetermined period, it is erased after the fluctuation, and again It may be displayed when the execution timing comes. Furthermore, once the specific effect is executed, it may be continuously executed over a plurality of variations until the variable display result becomes a big hit (the character image may be continuously displayed). ). In this case, in the special figure per waiting process of step S173, without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed, the specific effect Instead of clearing the flag to the off state, the flag should remain on. Then, when the specific effect flag is already on at step 050AKS001, the specific effect execution setting process may be terminated. According to this, it is possible to prevent overlooking which type of specific effect the executed specific effect is.

FIG. 11-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special effect processing executed by the characterizing portion 050AK. The special effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process of step S177 of FIG. 7, and is a process of executing a special effect corresponding to the executed specific effect as the ending effect. When the special effect processing shown in FIG. 11-5 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific effect flag is set to the ON state (step 050AKS021). If the specific effect flag is off (step 050AKS021; No), the special effect processing is terminated because the specific effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when the specific effect flag is ON (step 050AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of the executed specific effect (step 050AKS022). For example, when the type of specific effect is determined in step 050AKS013 of FIG. 11-2, the determined content is stored, and in step 050AKS022, the type of specific effect is identified by confirming this content. It is also possible to prepare specific effect flag A to specific effect flag C according to the type of specific effect, and set the corresponding type of specific effect flag to ON state at step 050AKS014 in FIG. 11-2. In that case, at step 050AKS022, the type of specific effect may be specified depending on which specific effect flag is in the ON state.

After executing the process of step 050AKS022 in FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 is according to the determined ratio shown in one of FIGS. The type of special effect to be executed is determined according to the set value, and the determined type of special effect is executed (step 050AKS023). As described above, the special effect executed in the characteristic portion 050AK is a battle effect in which a character displayed in a specific effect battles an enemy character. A special effect of a type such as "defeat" is prepared. "Victory", "Draw", and "Loss" each indicate the result of the battle production. In the characteristic part 050AK, a battle effect is performed as a special effect, and the result differs depending on the type of special effect. The type of the performance itself may be different according to the type of the special performance, such as the performance of dancing.

FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the type of specific effect executed is "character A". As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the "character A" type specific effect is executed, when the character of "character A" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. The determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the minimum set value "1" is denied (the set value is "2" or more) when the minimum set value is set. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to feel relieved that the minimum set value is not reached by executing the "win" special effect.

FIG. 11-6(B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the type of specific effect executed is "character B". As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the "character B" type specific effect is executed, when the character of "character B" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. The determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the set value is "3" or more when the set value is set. Also, FIG. 11-6(C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the type of the executed specific effect is "character C". As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the "character C" type specific effect is executed, when the character of "character C" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. The decision ratio is set so that when the set value is "4" or more, it is definitely notified. In this way, in the characteristic part 050AK of this embodiment, when a special effect of the type of "win" is executed, a definitive notification regarding the set value is performed (for example, a definitive notification that the set value has been changed is performed). ), it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the execution of the "win" type special effect.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, after executing the processing of step 050AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 clears the specific effect flag to the OFF state (step 050AKS024), and then ends the special effect processing. In addition, in the characterizing part 050AK in this embodiment, the specific effects are set to be executed in step 050AKS001 of FIG. 11-1, and the special effects are executed in step 050AKS023 of FIG. 11-5. (execution/non-execution, type of execution, etc.) are determined in two processes. For example, in step 050AKS001 of FIG. good too. In this case, if the result of the variable display is "losing", it may be decided not to execute the special effect.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a specific effect and a special effect are executed. In the illustrated example, a specific effect for "Character A" is executed, and a special effect for "Victory" is executed, that is, a setting suggestion effect is performed to definitely notify that the lowest setting value is reached. An example is shown. Variable display is started as shown in FIG. 11-7(a), becomes a reach state as shown in FIG. 11-7(b), and after developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-7(c) Then, in the second half of the ready-to-win performance of super reach, the specific performance execution period is reached, and the specific performance is executed. As shown in the figure, the image CH1 as the teammate character A is displayed in the lower right region of the image display device 5 by executing the specific effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-7(d), a variable display result is displayed and the game is controlled to a big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-7(e), the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type is performed. Then, when the ending of the jackpot game state is reached, as shown in FIGS. , an image CH2 as an enemy character is displayed, and an effect in which each character battles is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(h), the battle is won, and the jackpot game state ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 050K of the present embodiment, the specific effect executed in the second half of the reach effect of the super reach and the special effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state are set. Suggestions about the settings that are being used. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation regarding the setting suggesting effect according to the types of the specific effect and the special effect to be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

Further, once the specific effect in the characteristic part 050AK is executed, it is executed until the variable display result is derived and displayed. Moreover, once the specific effect in the characterizing part 050AK is executed, it may be continuously executed over a plurality of times of variation until the variable display result becomes a big hit. According to this, it is possible to prevent overlooking which type of specific effect the executed specific effect is.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 050AK)
In the characteristic part 050AK in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which one of a plurality of types of character images is displayed according to the set value in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect as the specific effect. , which is an example. The character image displayed as the specific effect may be, for example, an eye-catching image. An eye-catching image is an image that is displayed for a relatively short period of time (fixed at 1 second in this example) that is interposed between presentations (see, for example, FIG. 11-8(e)). Note that the eye-catching image may include characters that are not related to the content of the effect related to the lottery result related to the game (for example, characters such as the model name of the gaming machine). It is preferable that it is an image that can be stolen. It should be noted that the eye-catching image may be displayed when the result of the variable display is "loss". Then, the special effect may be executed when a big win is achieved in the variable display that is performed after the variable display in which the eye-catching image is displayed.

In this example, the eye-catching image is displayed after the background of the super ready-to-win state is displayed and before the background of decorative symbols to reach the ready-to-win state is displayed. Here, the background refers to all images (still images, moving images) other than decorative patterns (pictured patterns, pictureless patterns, small patterns) in variable display. It also includes images such as CG images and live-action images.

FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an effect operation example in the case of displaying an eye-catching image as a character image displayed as a specific effect. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-8(a) to 11-8(b), the normal background (here, mountain background) is displayed, and a variable display of decorative patterns in Gothic font is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8(c), when the reach state is reached, the super reach background (here, the image of the universe) is displayed, and the variable display of the decoration pattern of the small pattern is matched with the super reach background. are switched in order at a predetermined timing and executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (d), from the continuation of FIG. 11-8 (c) until the losing pattern is displayed, the super reach background is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. The variable display of the small pattern (only during the reach state) and the variable display of the Mincho decorative pattern (from the reach state to the display of the lost pattern) are switched in order at a predetermined timing according to the super reach background. executed. In addition, the Mincho decorative pattern of the missing pattern is displayed in a shaking display mode (a mode indicating that the display result is undetermined).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-8(e), for a predetermined period of time after the lost pattern is displayed, the small lost pattern is displayed in a shaking display mode (one second in this embodiment). At the same time, an eye-catching image is displayed instead of the background. The eye-catching image in this example may be a character image of one of the types "Character A" to "Character C" in the above-described embodiment, and an image with the model name of the pachinko machine 1 added. may be During the display of the eye-catching image, the transmittance of the image of the small pattern may be increased or the display of the small pattern may be omitted compared to before the eye-catching image is displayed.

After that, when the design confirmation command is received, as shown in FIG. 11-8(f), the background is switched to the normal background, and the missing Gothic decorative design is stopped and displayed as the finalized decorative design. Then, when a command at the start of variation such as the next variation start command is received, the next variation display is started as shown in FIG. 11-8(g). The mode of the variable display at this time is the same as in FIG. 11-8(a).

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8(e), during the display of the eye-catching image, the small missing symbols are displayed, so the player can confirm the results of the variable display. In addition, since the types of eye-catching images are displayed at different ratios according to the set values, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the types of eye-catching images to be displayed. Furthermore, since an eye-catching image is displayed as a specific effect when a losing pattern is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the special effect to be executed thereafter. It should be noted that after the eye-catching image is displayed and the background is switched to the normal background, it may be possible to execute a relief effect in which the result of the variable display is a big hit.

Further, in the characterizing portion 050AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific effect is the effect of displaying a character image in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect, but this is just an example. The specific effect may be, for example, a mode suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 049AK. Specifically, the character image of any one of the characters A to C is displayed according to the effect state as a mode suggesting effect suggesting which effect state of the effect mode A to effect mode C the effect mode is selected. In the ending in the jackpot game state, a battle effect by the displayed character may be executed as a special effect. According to this, by providing a plurality of production modes, it is possible to increase the variation of suggestion regarding the setting value and improve the game interest.

Also, in such a case, when the power is turned on, the current production mode is determined by lottery, and in the fluctuation after the power is turned on (for example, the first fluctuation or the fluctuation of 10 times), the production It suffices if the mode suggestion effect can be executed based on the mode. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio of mode C is determined to be high. In addition, since the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect that is executed at the time of control increases in the order of Mode C > Mode B > Mode A, the first game when the power is turned on , the setting suggestion effect executed as a combination of the specific effect and the special effect suggests content with high reliability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the game after the power is turned on.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 048AK, the characteristic portion 049AK, and the characteristic portion 050AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate. For example, in the probability variable state, the set value is suggested by a predetermined display like the characteristic part 048AK, and in the normal state, the set value is set at the ending in the big hit game state based on the controlled mode like the characteristic part 049AK You may make suggestions regarding Further, as described above, the mode suggestion effect at the characteristic portion 049AK may be the specific effect at the characteristic portion 050AK, and the setting value may be suggested by the specific effect and the special effect.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control section Z1 ... Controller image Z17 ... Handle image Z3 ... Push button images ZA1-5 ... Parts images ZB1-4 ... Parts images ZC1-5 ... Parts images

Claims (1)

A game machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result,
a detection means configured by a plurality of parts capable of detecting the action of the player;
promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect to prompt the player to perform an action detectable by the detection means;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes before the promotion effect is executed;
with
The promotion effects include a specific promotion effect executed in accordance with the specific effect, and a predetermined promotion effect executed in accordance with a predetermined effect executed independently of the specific effect,
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect using a special effect image different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect execution means is
a plurality of oblique component images simulating a state in which each component constituting the detection means is viewed obliquely can be displayed as the specific effect image;
In the specific effect, the specific effect image may be changed from an unfinished stage display mode in which the plurality of perspective part images are separated to a completed stage display mode in which all of the plurality of perspective part images are assembled. is possible and
In the specific effect, the separated oblique component images are displayed as if they were positioned on the front side of the screen near the player, and the size of the image is gradually reduced so that the image is displayed farther away from the player. Display so as to approach the perspective part image displayed as if it is located at the back of the screen,
The plurality of oblique component images displayed as the specific effect images are internal components having portions that are invisible to the player when the detecting means is completed by each of the components constituting the detecting means. While including the perspective part image of the predetermined part, it does not include the perspective part image of the predetermined part,
the perspective component image of the internal component is a simplified image in which a part of the shape of the internal component is omitted;
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. can be,
the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode when the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the display mode of the completion stage in the specific effect ,
The simplified image is an image in which a connector of the internal component is omitted.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images